FF240001
Owner’s Manual

BL00005315-200 EN

Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure thatyou have read this manual and understood its contents before using the camera. Keep the manual where it will beread by all who use the product.
For the Latest Information
The latest versions of the manuals are available from:https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/

The website can be accessed not only fromyour computer but also from smartphones
and tablets. It also contains information on
the software license.
For information on firmware updates, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/iiP Chapter Index
Menu List

iv

1 Before You Begin1

2 First Steps

35

3 Basic Photography and Playback

51

4 Movie Recording and Playback

59

5 Taking Photographs

67

6 The Shooting Menus

125

7 Playback and the Playback Menu

227

8 Network/USB Features and Settings

255

9 The Setup Menus

289

10 Shortcuts

329

11 Peripherals and Optional Accessories

349

12 Technical Notes

367

iii

Menu List
Camera menu options are listed below.

Menu List

Shooting Menus
Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies.

N See page 125 for details.
Photo Menus

N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still

photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items ineither menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.

H IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
1⁄4
FILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTINGFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECTCOLOR CHROME FX BLUESMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
WHITE BALANCE
2⁄4DYNAMIC RANGED RANGE PRIORITY
TONE CURVE
COLOR

iv

P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGP126
SHARPNESS
140127
HIGH ISO NR
141
128
CLARITY
141
129
LONG EXPOSURE NR
142
3⁄4
129
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
142
130
COLOR SPACE
142
132
PIXEL MAPPING
143
132
143
x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
133
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 144
133 4⁄4 AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 149
133
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 149
134
138
139
140
140

Menu Listv

Menu List

P A SHOOTING SETTINGPG AF/MF SETTING
FOCUS BKT SETTING
176
FOCUS AREA
152
PHOTOMETRY176
AF MODE152
SHUTTER TYPE
176
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING152
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING178
AF MODE ALL SETTING
152
1⁄3
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
153 2⁄3 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING180
EXPOSURE SMOOTHINGSTORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 157
INTERVALPRIORITY
MODE
180
157
AF POINT DISPLAYyz
FLICKERREDUCTION
181
158
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
181
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
158
IS MODE
182
PRE-AF
159
ISO
182
AF ILLUMINATOR
159 3⁄3
DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
183
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 160
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 183
2⁄3 SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
162
AF+MF
164 F FLASH SETTINGP
MF ASSIST
165 FLASH FUNCTION SETTING184
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST &184
166 RED EYE REMOVAL
FOCUS RING
TTL-LOCK MODE
185
FOCUS CHECK
166 LED LIGHT SETTING185
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 167 COMMANDER SETTING
186
167 CH SETTINGxF INSTANT AF SETTING
186
168
3⁄3 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALEPRELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
168 B MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE
MODE
187
169
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
187
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
170 HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTING187
P F IS MODEA SHOOTING SETTING
187
AUTO MODE SETTING
172 F IS MODE BOOST
187
SPORTS FINDER MODE
172 AUDIO SETTING
188
173 MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
PRE-SHOT sJ
191
SELF-TIMER
174 F REC FRAME INDICATOR
191
1⁄3
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING174
SELF-TIMER LAMP
175
AE BKT SETTING
175
FILM SIMULATION BKT176

Movie Menus

N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still

photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items ineither menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.

Menu ListPP H IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGB MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST192
F FILM SIMULATION DIAL
207
SETTINGMOVIE MODE
193
207
F FILM SIMULATIONHIGH SPEED REC
194
207
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
195
F SELF-TIMER
1⁄3207
MEDIA REC SETTING
195 1⁄2 F WHITE BALANCE208
F DYNAMIC RANGEHDMI OUTPUT SETTING
198
208
F TONE CURVEFIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
199
208
F COLOR
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
200
209
DATA LEVEL SETTING201
F SHARPNESS201
209
F PHOTOMETRYF HIGH ISO NR
INTERFRAME NR
209
201
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
2⁄2
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION 210
202
F IS MODE
2⁄3xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 210
202
F IS MODE BOOST
203
F ISO
ZEBRA SETTING203
ZEBRA LEVEL
203
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL 204
204
F REC FRAME INDICATORTALLY LIGHT
205
206
F
SELECTCUSTOM
SETTING
3⁄3
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 206
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM206
SETTINGxF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 206

vi

Menu List

P P AUDIO SETTINGPINTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 219
211
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 219
211
MIC JACK SETTING
220
212
220
212 1⁄2 MIC LEVEL LIMITER
WIND FILTER
220
213
LOW CUT FILTER
221
213
HEADPHONES VOLUME
221
214
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
221
222
214 2⁄2 XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING

214 Q TIME CODE SETTINGTIME CODE DISPLAY
215
START TIME SETTING
215
COUNT UP SETTING
215 DROP FRAME
215 HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
216 TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING
218

P

223
223
223
224
224
225

vii

Menu List

G AF/MF SETTINGF FOCUS AREA
F AF MODE
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGxF WRAP FOCUS POINT
1⁄2 Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTINGF SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
F AF+MF
F MF ASSISTF INTERLOCK MF ASSIST &FOCUS RINGF FOCUS CHECKxF INSTANT AF SETTING
2⁄2
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
xF AF RANGE LIMITERF TOUCH SCREEN MODE
FOCUS CHECK LOCKThe Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.

N See page 234 for details.
Menu List

C PLAY BACK MENU
RAW CONVERSIONHEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
CROP
1⁄2
RESIZEPROTECT
IMAGE ROTATEVOICE MEMO SETTING

viii

P C PLAY BACK MENUP
234
RATING
245
238
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE 246
238
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 248
240
SLIDE SHOW
249
2⁄2
241
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST
250
242
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
252
243
instax PRINTER PRINT
253
244
DISP ASPECT254

Menu List

Setup Menus
Adjust basic camera settings.

N See page 289 for details.
P D SOUND SETTINGP

AF BEEP VOL.
296
290
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
296
291
OPERATION VOL.
297
291
297
F REC START/STOP VOLUME
292
293 1⁄2 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
297
VOLUME293
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
293
298
SOUND
294
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME 298
294
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND 298
294
299
295 2⁄2 PLAYBACK VOLUME
4ch
AUDIO
PLAYBACK
299
295

ix

Menu List

D USER SETTINGFORMATb AREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
TIME DIFFERENCE
1⁄2
Qa
x MY MENU SETTINGF MY MENU SETTINGSENSOR CLEANINGSOUND & FLASHFIRMWARE UPDATE
2⁄2
RESET
REGULATORY

Menu List

P D BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGD SCREEN SETTING
VIEW MODE SETTING300
FOCUS LEVER SETTINGEVF BRIGHTNESS
300
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUEVF COLOR300
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUEVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT301
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
1⁄4
LCD BRIGHTNESS
301 1⁄3 POWER ZOOM LENSFUNCTION (Fn) SETTINGLCD COLOR
301
COMMAND DIAL SETTINGLCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
301
o S.S. OPERATIONIMAGE DISP.
302
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS302
SHUTTER AF
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 303
SHUTTER AE
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
303
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS
F-Log VIEW ASSIST304
2⁄4ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
304 2⁄3 SHOOT WITHOUT CARDLENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTINGFRAMING GUIDELINE304
AE/AF-LOCK MODE
AUTOROTATE PB
305
AWB-LOCK MODE
FOCUS SCALE UNITS305
APERTURE RING SETTING (A)APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS 305
APERTURE SETTINGDISP. CUSTOM SETTING
306
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTINGLARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)306
3⁄3
TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGLARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
307
3⁄4
LOCK
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 308
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
308
LOCATION INFO
309
309
x Q MENU BACKGROUND
4⁄4 F Q MENU BACKGROUND
309

x

P

310
311
311
311
311
312
313
313
314
314
315
315
316
318
318
318
319
319
320
322

Menu List

D POWER MANAGEMENTAUTO POWER OFFPERFORMANCEEVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

P

325
326
326
327
327

FRAME NO.
EDIT FILE NAME
SELECT FOLDERCOPYRIGHT INFOGEOTAGGING

xi

Menu List

P D SAVE DATA SETTING

323
323
324
324

Menu List

The Network/USB Settings Menu
Adjust camera network and USB settings.

N See page 279 for details.
Menu ListP
I NETWORK/USB SETTING
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING 279
AIRPLANE MODE
283
NETWORK SETTING
283
instax PRINTER CONNECTION
283
SETTING
1⁄2
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
284
CONNECTION MODE
287
USB POWER SUPPLY/
288
COMM SETTING
INFORMATION
288
2⁄2 RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING
288

xii

P Table of Contents
Introduction ..........................................................................................................ii
For the Latest Information .......................................................................................... ii
Menu List...............................................................................................................iv
Shooting Menus ..............................................................................................................iv
The Playback Menu......................................................................................................viii
Setup Menus ...................................................................................................................... ix
The Network/USB Settings Menu ........................................................................xii
Supplied Accessories ..................................................................................xxvii
About This Manual......................................................................................xxviii
Symbols and Conventions .................................................................................xxviii
Terminology ................................................................................................................xxviii

1 Before You Begin

1

Parts of the Camera ............................................................................................2
The Serial Number Plate ..............................................................................................4
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) ...................................................................................4
The Shutter Speed Dial.................................................................................................4
Film Simulation Dial........................................................................................................5
The DRIVE Button .............................................................................................................7
The Exposure Compensation Dial .........................................................................7
The Auto Mode Selector Lever ................................................................................8
The Command Dials.......................................................................................................9The Indicator Lamp...................................................................................................... 12
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 13
Focusing the Viewfinder ........................................................................................... 13
Camera Displays ............................................................................................... 14
The Electronic Viewfinder ........................................................................................ 14
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 16
Choosing a Display Mode........................................................................................ 18
Adjusting Display Brightness ................................................................................. 20
Display Rotation ............................................................................................................. 20
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................... 21
Customizing Display Indicators............................................................................ 23
Virtual Horizon ................................................................................................................ 25

xiii

Using the Menus .............................................................................................. 26
The Menus......................................................................................................................... 26
Selecting a Menu Tab ................................................................................................. 27
Touch Screen Mode......................................................................................... 28
Shooting Touch Controls ......................................................................................... 28
Playback Touch Controls........................................................................................... 33

2 First Steps

35

3 Basic Photography and Playback

51

4 Movie Recording and Playback

59

5 Taking Photographs

67

Attaching the Strap ......................................................................................... 36
Attaching a Lens ............................................................................................... 37
Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card .............................................. 39
Compatible Memory Cards .................................................................................... 41
Charging the Battery ...................................................................................... 42
Turning the Camera On and Off ................................................................. 45
Checking the Battery Level........................................................................... 46
Basic Setup ......................................................................................................... 47
Choosing a Different Language........................................................................... 49
Changing the Time and Date ................................................................................ 49

Taking Photographs ........................................................................................ 52
Viewing Pictures ............................................................................................... 54
HDMI Output ................................................................................................................... 55
Deleting Pictures .............................................................................................. 57

Recording Movies ............................................................................................ 60
Adjusting Movie Settings ......................................................................................... 63
Viewing Movies................................................................................................. 64

Choosing a Shooting Mode ......................................................................... 68
Y (AUTO).......................................................................................................................... 68
Mode P: Program AE ................................................................................................... 72
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE..................................................................................... 74
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ................................................................................ 79
Mode M: Manual Exposure ..................................................................................... 81xiv

Table of Contents

Autofocus ............................................................................................................ 83
Focus Mode ...................................................................................................................... 84
Autofocus Options (AF Mode) .............................................................................. 86
Focus-Point Selection................................................................................................. 88
Manual Focus..................................................................................................... 92
Checking Focus .............................................................................................................. 94
Sensitivity............................................................................................................ 97
AUTO ..................................................................................................................................... 98
Metering .............................................................................................................. 99
Exposure Compensation .............................................................................100
C (Custom)...................................................................................................................... 101
Focus/Exposure Lock ....................................................................................102
Other Controls ............................................................................................................. 103
Bracketing .........................................................................................................104
W ISO BKT ..................................................................................................................... 105
V WHITE BALANCE BKT ....................................................................................... 105
s Bracketing ............................................................................................................... 106
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode).........................................................109
HDR .....................................................................................................................111
Multiple Exposures ........................................................................................113
Panoramas ........................................................................................................116
Advanced Filters .............................................................................................119
Advanced Filter Options ........................................................................................ 120
Flash Photography.........................................................................................121
Flash Settings................................................................................................................ 123

6 The Shooting Menus

125

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) .....................................126
IMAGE SIZE ..................................................................................................................... 126
IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................................................... 127
RAW RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 128
SELECT JPEG/HEIF...................................................................................................... 129
FILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTING ..................................................................... 129
FILM SIMULATION ...................................................................................................... 130
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR.................................................................................. 132
GRAIN EFFECT .............................................................................................................. 132

xv

COLOR CHROME EFFECT....................................................................................... 133
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE ..................................................................................... 133
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT ............................................................................................ 133
WHITE BALANCE ......................................................................................................... 134
DYNAMIC RANGE ....................................................................................................... 138
D RANGE PRIORITY .................................................................................................... 139
TONE CURVE.................................................................................................................. 140
COLOR ............................................................................................................................... 140
SHARPNESS .................................................................................................................... 140
HIGH ISO NR .................................................................................................................. 141
CLARITY ............................................................................................................................ 141
LONG EXPOSURE NR ................................................................................................ 142
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ....................................................................... 142
COLOR SPACE ............................................................................................................... 142
PIXEL MAPPING ........................................................................................................... 143
x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................ 143
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ..................................................................... 144
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING.................................................................... 149
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 149
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................152
FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................. 152
AF MODE ......................................................................................................................... 152
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING ....................................................................................... 152
AF MODE ALL SETTING .......................................................................................... 152
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 153
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................. 157
AF POINT DISPLAY yz ...................................................................................... 157
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 158
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS................................................................................ 158
PRE-AF ............................................................................................................................... 159
AF ILLUMINATOR ........................................................................................................ 159
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................. 160
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 162
AF+MF .............................................................................................................................. 164
MF ASSIST ....................................................................................................................... 165
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING .......................................................... 166

xvi

Table of Contents

FOCUS CHECK .............................................................................................................. 166
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA.............................................................. 167
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 167
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 168
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ................................................................................... 168
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 169
TOUCH SCREEN MODE ........................................................................................... 170
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)................................................172
AUTO MODE SETTING ............................................................................................. 172
SPORTS FINDER MODE ........................................................................................... 172
PRE-SHOT sJ .......................................................................................................... 173
SELF-TIMER ..................................................................................................................... 174
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING.................................................................................... 174
SELF-TIMER LAMP....................................................................................................... 175
AE BKT SETTING .......................................................................................................... 175
FILM SIMULATION BKT ............................................................................................ 176
FOCUS BKT SETTING ................................................................................................ 176
PHOTOMETRY ............................................................................................................... 176
SHUTTER TYPE.............................................................................................................. 176
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING ................................................................................ 178
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING........................ 180
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE ................................................................................... 180
FLICKER REDUCTION ................................................................................................ 181
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING ..................................................................................... 181
IS MODE ........................................................................................................................... 182
ISO ....................................................................................................................................... 182
DIGITAL TELE-CONV. ................................................................................................. 183
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 183
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................184
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................. 184
RED EYE REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 184
TTL-LOCK MODE ......................................................................................................... 185
LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................. 185
COMMANDER SETTING .......................................................................................... 186
CH SETTING ................................................................................................................... 186

xvii

MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................187
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 187
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 187
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 187
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 187
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 187
AUDIO SETTING........................................................................................................... 188
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE ............................................................................................ 191
F REC FRAME INDICATOR ................................................................................... 191
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................192
MOVIE SETTING LIST................................................................................................. 192
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 193
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 194
F SELF-TIMER .............................................................................................................. 195
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 195
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING......................................................................................... 198
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION .................................................................. 199
F-Log/HLG RECORDING ......................................................................................... 200
DATA LEVEL SETTING ............................................................................................... 201
F PHOTOMETRY ....................................................................................................... 201
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING.............................................................................. 201
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 202
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 202
F ISO ................................................................................................................................ 203
ZEBRA SETTING ........................................................................................................... 203
ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................. 203
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ................................................................ 204
F REC FRAME INDICATOR ................................................................................... 204
TALLY LIGHT ................................................................................................................... 205
F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING............................................................................. 206
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING...................................................................... 206
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................ 206
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 206
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ......................................207
F FILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTING .............................................................. 207
F FILM SIMULATION............................................................................................... 207

xviii

Table of Contents

F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .......................................................................... 207
F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................. 207
F DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................ 208
F TONE CURVE .......................................................................................................... 208
F COLOR........................................................................................................................ 208
F SHARPNESS............................................................................................................. 209
F HIGH ISO NR ........................................................................................................... 209
INTERFRAME NR .......................................................................................................... 209
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................. 210
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 210
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................211
F FOCUS AREA .......................................................................................................... 211
F AF MODE .................................................................................................................. 211
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................. 212
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 212
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................... 213
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 213
F AF+MF ....................................................................................................................... 214
F MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................ 214
F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING ................................................... 214
F FOCUS CHECK ....................................................................................................... 215
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 215
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 215
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 215
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE .................................................................................... 216
FOCUS CHECK LOCK ................................................................................................ 218
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording).........................................................219
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT............................................................... 219
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 219
MIC JACK SETTING..................................................................................................... 220
MIC LEVEL LIMITER .................................................................................................... 220
WIND FILTER .................................................................................................................. 220
LOW CUT FILTER .......................................................................................................... 221
HEADPHONES VOLUME ......................................................................................... 221
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE ............................................................................................ 221
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING................................................................................. 222

xix

TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)................................................223
TIME CODE DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 223
START TIME SETTING ................................................................................................ 223
COUNT UP SETTING.................................................................................................. 223
DROP FRAME ................................................................................................................ 224
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ................................................................................... 224
TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING .................................................................................. 225

7 Playback and the Playback Menu

227

The Playback Display ....................................................................................228
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................ 230
Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................232
Playback Zoom ............................................................................................................ 233
Multi-Frame Playback .............................................................................................. 233
The Playback Menu .......................................................................................234
RAW CONVERSION .................................................................................................... 234
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ...................................................................... 238
ERASE ................................................................................................................................. 238
CROP .................................................................................................................................. 240
RESIZE ................................................................................................................................ 241
PROTECT .......................................................................................................................... 242
IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................. 243
VOICE MEMO SETTING............................................................................................ 244
RATING .............................................................................................................................. 245
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE.............................................................. 246
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 248
SLIDE SHOW .................................................................................................................. 249
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST ................................................................................................ 250
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ............................................................................................... 252
instax PRINTER PRINT ............................................................................................... 253
DISP ASPECT.................................................................................................................. 254

xx

Table of Contents

8 Network/USB Features and Settings

255

Overview ...........................................................................................................256
Supported Features .................................................................................................. 256
Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)..............................................258
Installing Smartphone Apps ............................................................................... 258
Connecting to a Smartphone ............................................................................ 258
Using the Smartphone App ................................................................................ 260
Connecting to Smartphones (USB) .........................................................262
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone ................................................................ 262
Connecting the Camera and Computer ..................................................... 265
Using the Camera as a Webcam ...............................................................267
instax SHARE Printers ...................................................................................268
Establishing a Connection.................................................................................... 268
Printing Pictures .......................................................................................................... 269
Uploading Files to Frame.io........................................................................270
Connecting via Wireless LAN .............................................................................. 270
Uploading Items to Frame.io .............................................................................. 274
RAW Processing ..............................................................................................277
Saving and Loading Settings .....................................................................278
Saving and Loading Settings Using a Computer ................................... 278
Network/USB Setting Menus .....................................................................279
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING ................................................................. 279
AIRPLANE MODE ........................................................................................................ 283
NETWORK SETTING .................................................................................................. 283
instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING........................................................ 283
Frame.io Camera to Cloud.................................................................................... 284
CONNECTION MODE ............................................................................................... 287
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING .......................................................... 288
INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 288
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING ........................................................................ 288

xxi

9 The Setup Menus

289

USER SETTING .................................................................................................290
FORMAT............................................................................................................................ 290
b AREA SETTING..................................................................................................... 291
DATE/TIME ...................................................................................................................... 291
TIME DIFFERENCE....................................................................................................... 292
Qa ............................................................................................................... 293
x MY MENU SETTING............................................................................................ 293
F MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 293
SENSOR CLEANING ................................................................................................... 294
SOUND & FLASH ......................................................................................................... 294
FIRMWARE UPDATE ................................................................................................... 294
RESET ................................................................................................................................. 295
REGULATORY................................................................................................................. 295
SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................296
AF BEEP VOL. ................................................................................................................. 296
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ............................................................................................. 296
OPERATION VOL. ......................................................................................................... 297
F REC START/STOP VOLUME ............................................................................. 297
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ........................................................ 297
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND .......................................................... 298
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ............................................................... 298
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ................................................................. 298
PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................. 299
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK ............................................................................................. 299
SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................300
VIEW MODE SETTING............................................................................................... 300
EVF BRIGHTNESS ......................................................................................................... 300
EVF COLOR ..................................................................................................................... 300
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 301
LCD BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................ 301
LCD COLOR .................................................................................................................... 301
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................... 301
IMAGE DISP. .................................................................................................................... 302
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS .......................................................................................... 302
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ........................................................... 303

xxii

Table of Contents

NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................. 303
F-Log VIEW ASSIST ..................................................................................................... 304
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING .............................................................................. 304
FRAMING GUIDELINE ............................................................................................... 304
AUTOROTATE PB.......................................................................................................... 305
FOCUS SCALE UNITS ................................................................................................ 305
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS................................................................ 305
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING .......................................................................................... 306
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ....................................................................... 306
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ...................................................................... 307
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................. 308
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.......................................................................... 308
LOCATION INFO........................................................................................................... 309
x Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 309
F Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 309
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING................................................................................310
FOCUS LEVER SETTING ........................................................................................... 310
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 311
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 311
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING........................................................................................ 311
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING ........................................ 311
COMMAND DIAL SETTING ................................................................................... 312
o S.S. OPERATION ................................................................................................... 313
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.............................................................................. 313
SHUTTER AF................................................................................................................... 314
SHUTTER AE................................................................................................................... 314
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS .......................................................................................... 315
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD......................................................................................... 315
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING ............................................................................ 316
AE/AF-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 318
AWB-LOCK MODE ...................................................................................................... 318
APERTURE RING SETTING (A) .............................................................................. 318
APERTURE SETTING .................................................................................................. 319
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING ..................................................................................... 319
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ...................................................................................... 320
LOCK................................................................................................................................... 322

xxiii

POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................323
AUTO POWER OFF ..................................................................................................... 323
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................ 323
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING ..................................................................................... 324
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. ....................................................................................... 324
SAVE DATA SETTING ......................................................................................325
FRAME NO. ..................................................................................................................... 325
EDIT FILE NAME ........................................................................................................... 326
SELECT FOLDER........................................................................................................... 326
COPYRIGHT INFO........................................................................................................ 327
GEOTAGGING ................................................................................................................ 327

10Shortcuts

329

Shortcut Options ............................................................................................330
MY MENU ..........................................................................................................331
MY MENU SETTING ................................................................................................... 331
The Quick Menu .............................................................................................333
The Quick Menu Display........................................................................................ 333
Viewing and Changing Settings ....................................................................... 335
Editing the Quick Menu ......................................................................................... 336
Function Controls...........................................................................................339
The Function Buttons .............................................................................................. 339
Touch-Function Gestures ...................................................................................... 343
Lens Function Buttons ............................................................................................ 345

xxiv

Table of Contents

11Peripherals and Optional Accessories

349

12Technical Notes

367

Lenses.................................................................................................................350
Lens Parts ........................................................................................................................ 350
Lens Care ......................................................................................................................... 351
Removing Lens Caps ............................................................................................... 351
Attaching Lens Hoods ............................................................................................ 352
Lenses with Aperture Rings................................................................................. 353
Lenses with No Aperture Rings ......................................................................... 354
Lenses with O.I.S. Switches ................................................................................... 354
Manual Focus Lenses ............................................................................................... 355
Power Zoom Lenses ................................................................................................. 356
External Flash Units .......................................................................................357
Using an External Flash .......................................................................................... 358
SYNC TERMINAL .......................................................................................................... 359
SHOE MOUNT FLASH............................................................................................... 360
COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ........................................................................................ 363

Accessories from Fujifilm.............................................................................368
Software and Services for Use with Your Camera...............................370
Smartphone Apps ..................................................................................................... 370
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX..................................... 370
FUJIFILM RAW Converter ....................................................................................... 371
Capture One .................................................................................................................. 371
FUJIFILM X Acquire ................................................................................................... 371
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ....................................................................................... 372
Frame.io Camera to Cloud.................................................................................... 372
For Your Safety ................................................................................................373
Product Care ....................................................................................................385
Cleaning the Image Sensor ........................................................................386
Firmware Updates..........................................................................................387
Downloading Firmware ......................................................................................... 387
Updating Firmware ................................................................................................... 387

xxv

Table of Contents

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................390
Power and Battery ..................................................................................................... 390
Menus and Displays ................................................................................................. 392
Shooting .......................................................................................................................... 393
Playback ........................................................................................................................... 398
During Connection ................................................................................................... 399
Wireless Transfer.......................................................................................................... 401
Miscellaneous............................................................................................................... 402
Warning Messages and Displays ..............................................................403
Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................408
Specifications ..................................................................................................409

xxvi

Supplied Accessories
The following are included with the camera:• NP-W126S rechargeable battery• USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.)• Body cap (comes attached to camera)• Shoulder strap• Headphone adapter

O The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before use(P 42).

N • If you purchased a lens kit, check that a lens is included.
• The headphone adapter converts the USB Type-C connector to a
⌀3.5 mm headphone jack.

• For information on compatible computer software, see “Software andServices for Use with Your Camera” (P 370).

xxvii

About This ManualThis manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X-T50
digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its
contents before proceeding.
Symbols and Conventions
The following symbols are used in this manual:
O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the
product.
Additional
information that may be helpful when using theNproduct.
P Pages on which related information may be found.
Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations
are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplified,
while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model ofcamera described in this manual.
Terminology
The optional SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards the camera
uses to store pictures are referred to as “memory cards”. The electronic viewfinder may be referred to as the “EVF” and the LCD
monitor as the “LCD”. Smartphones and tablets are referred to as“smartphones”.

xxviiiBefore You Begin

1

Parts of the Camera

1
Before You Begin

A Fn1 button .....................................................339 M Lens release button ........................................37
B Shutter button .................................................53 N Microphone ............................................ 60, 219
C Exposure compensation dial................7, 100 O AF-assist illuminator...................................159
Self-timer lamp ............................................174
D Auto mode selector lever ................................8
Tally light ........................................................205
E Shutter speed dial.................................................4, 72, 74, 79, 81 P Front command dial...............................9, 312
F Hot shoe .........................................................358 Q ON/OFF switch .................................................45
G Film simulation dial .........................................5 R Flash ................................................................121
H N (ﬂash pop-up) lever................................121 S Body cap............................................................37
I Strap clip............................................................36 T Microphone/remote release connector(⌀3.5mm) ......................................62, 78, 221
J Connector cover
K Focus mode selector ......................................84 U USB connector (Type-C) ..................... 42, 262
V HDMI Micro connector (Type D) ................55
L Lens signal contacts

O T Use of an optional RR-100 remote release requires a third-party

adapter to convert the three-pin, ⌀2.5 mm connector to a threepin, ⌀3.5 mm connector.

2

Parts of the Camera

1
Before You BeginW DRIVE button......................................................7 i DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 21, 230b (delete) button ...........................................57

x(Bluetooth) button ..................................258

X a (playback) button ...................................54 j Cable channel cover for DC coupler
Y Diopter adjustment control .........................13 k Battery-chamber cover .................................39l Battery-chamber cover latch ......................39
Z Electronic viewﬁnder (EVF)..................................................... 14, 18, 20, 28 m Tripod mounta Fn2 button .....................................................339 n Speaker .................................................... 64, 299
b AFON button .........................................103, 339 o LCD monitor .......................................13, 16, 18
Touch screen .................................28, 170, 216
c Rear command dial .......................9, 232, 312
d Indicator lamp ....................................... 12, 205 p Eye sensor..........................................................19
Tally light ........................................................205 q Battery latch ....................................................40
e AEL (exposure lock) button ..............103, 339 r Battery chamber .............................................39f Q (quick menu) button ...............................333 s Memory card slot............................................39
g Focus stick (focus lever)...................4, 89, 310 t Serial number plate..........................................4h MENU/OK button .............................................26

3

The Serial Number Plate
Do not remove the serial number plate,which provides the CMIIT ID, serial number, and other important information.

1

Serial number plate

Before You Begin

The Focus Stick (Focus Lever)
Tilt or press the focus stick to select the focus area. The focus stick can also be used
to navigate the menus.

N • To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the center of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER
SETTING.
• Use G AF/MF SETTING > xF WRAP FOCUS POINT to choose
whether focus-area selection is bounded by the borders of the display or “wraps around” from one edge of the display to another.

The Shutter Speed Dial
The shutter speed dial is used to choose
the shutter speed.

4Parts of the Camera

Film Simulation Dial
Rotate the film simulation dial and set the icon
to the indicator to configure the film simulation.

Film Simulation Dial

1

Description

Shoot with each ﬁlm simulation. When shooting with a ACROS, use H IMAGE QUALITYSETTING > FILM SIMULATION DIALSETTING to set the ﬁlter.

FS1
FS2
FS3

Shoot with a ﬁlm simulation set in H IMAGEQUALITY SETTING > FILM SIMULATIONDIAL SETTING. Separate settings are available
for still photography and movie recording.

C (Custom)

Shoot with a ﬁlm simulation set in H IMAGEQUALITY SETTING > FILM SIMULATION
or in F FILM SIMULATION without setting aﬁlm simulation with the ﬁlm simulation dial. The
ﬁlm simulation setting can be changed with thecommand dial (P 312).

5

Before You Begin

c PROVIA/STANDARD
d Velvia/VIVID
e ASTIA/SOFT
i CLASSIC CHROME
c REALA ACE
g CLASSIC Neg.
n NOSTALGIC Neg.
a ACROSN The following settings are valid only when the film simulation dial isset to C.
• Settings of H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > FILM SIMULATION or
F FILM SIMULATION• Settings of the film simulation in the Q menu
• Settings by the function buttons to which a film simulation has been
assigned• Settings of V FILM SIMULATION saved in H IMAGE QUALITY

1
Before You Begin

SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or in B MOVIESETTING > F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

6

Parts of the Camera

The DRIVE Button
Pressing the DRIVE button displays drivemode menu, where you can choose fromthe following the drive modes.

1
P
68
109
109
105
105
106

Mode
h HDR
j Multiple exposure
Adv. Adv. MODE
F Movie

P
111
113
116
119
60

The Exposure Compensation Dial
Rotate the dial to choose an exposurecompensation amount.

7

Before You BeginMode
B Single frame
J High-speed burst
O Low-speed burst
W ISO BKTV WHITE BALANCE BKTBKT Bracketing

The Auto Mode Selector Lever
Switch between auto and manual modes.

1
Before You Begin

Position

Mode
P
Select from P (program AE), S (shutter-priority AE), A (ap72,
erture-priority AE), and M (manual) modes. Adjust shutter
74,
speed and aperture using program shift (mode P) or set
79,
shutter speed and/or aperture manually (modes S, A, and81
M).
Auto mode. The camera adjusts settings automatically according to the option selected by rotating the front command dial. Choose from modes suited to speciﬁc subject
68
types, or select AUTO to let the camera automaticallymatch the mode to the subject. Scene selection is notavailable in drive modes W, V, BKT
BKT, and h.

N Restrictions may apply to camera settings depending on the modeand shooting conditions.

8Parts of the Camera

The Command Dials
Rotate or press the command dials to:
Front command dial

Rear command dial

1

RotatePress

through menus• Adjust aperture• Choose a scene (auto mode)• Choose a ﬁlm simulation• Adjust exposure compensation• Adjust sensitivity• View other pictures during
playback• Highlight menu items• Choose the desired combina-

tion of shutter speed and aperture (program shift)• Choose a shutter speed• Adjust exposure compensation• Adjust settings in the quick menu
• Choose the size of the focus frame• Zoom in or out in full frame playback• Zoom in or out in multi-frame
playback• Choose the roles played by the • Zoom* in on the active focus
front command dial (P 10).
point
• Press and hold to choose the op- • Press and hold to choose the*tion selected for D BUTTON/ manual focus mode focus display
DIAL SETTING > COMMAND • Zoom in on the active focus
DIAL SETTING in the D (setup) point during playbackmenu* Available only if FOCUS CHECK is assigned to a function button.

N The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.

9

Before You Begin• Select menu tabs or page

Choosing a Function for the Front Command Dial
Press the center of the front command dial during shooting
to choose a function assigned in DBUTTON/DIAL SETTING >COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

1
Before You Begin

The following functions can be assigned.
Function
Description
S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT) Select a shutter speed. Program shift is possible in mode P.
Adjust aperture when the aperture setting is A (auto)and D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE RING
APERTURE
SETTING (A) is COMMAND or when the lens is not
equipped with an aperture ring.
Adjust exposure compensation when the exposure comEXP. COMPENSATION
pensation dial is set to C.
ISO
Adjust sensitivity.
Choose a ﬁlm simulation when the ﬁlm simulation dial is
FILM SIMULATION
set to C.

N • Choose between FILM SIMULATION and AUTO MODE SETTING
when the auto mode selector lever is set to AUTO (P 70).
• Depending on the shooting mode or drive mode, some functions

cannot be assigned or may be disabled even if they have been assigned.

10

Parts of the Camera

Choosing a Function for the Rear Command Dial
Values of the functions assigned by REAR COMMAND DIAL in
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING can be
adjusted by the rear command dial during shooting. The following functions can be assigned to the dial.

N • The function is automatically switched to EXP. COMPENSATION when
the auto mode selector lever is set to AUTO.
• Depending on the shooting mode or drive mode, some functions

cannot be assigned or may be disabled even if they have been assigned.

11

1
Before You Begin

Function
Description
S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT) Select a shutter speed. Program shift is possible in mode P.
Adjust aperture when the aperture setting is A (auto)and D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE RING
APERTURE
SETTING (A) is COMMAND or when the lens is not
equipped with an aperture ring.
Adjust exposure compensation when the exposure comEXP. COMPENSATION
pensation dial is set to C.
ISO
Adjust sensitivity.
Choose a ﬁlm simulation when the ﬁlm simulation dial is
FILM SIMULATION
set to C.

The Indicator Lamp
Camera status is shown by the indicatorlamp.

1
Before You Begin

Indicator lamp
Glows green
Blinks green

Blinks green andorangeGlows orange
Blinks orange
Blinks red

Camera status
Focus locked.
Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can betaken.
• Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for
conﬁrmation after being taken with option other thanOFF selected for D SCREEN SETTING > IMAGE
DISP. (additional pictures can be taken).
off: Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tab• Camera
let. *
Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken
at this time.
Flash charging; ﬂash will not ﬁre when picture is taken.
Lens or memory error.

* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload.

N • Warnings may also appear in the display.
• The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfinder.
• The B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used tochoose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
• The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are off during
interval-timer photography.

12Parts of the Camera

The LCD Monitor
The LCD monitor can be tilted for easier viewing, but be careful not to touch
the wires or trap fingers or other objects
behind the monitor. Touching the wires
could cause camera malfunction.

1

Focusing the Viewfinder
If the indicators displayed in the viewfinder are blurred, put your eye to theviewfinder and rotate the diopter adjustment control until the display is in sharp
focus.

13

Before You Begin

N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:• Touch photography (P 29)• Focus area selection (P 28)• Function selection (P 31)• Movie optimized control oL (P 30)• Playback (P 33)

Camera Displays
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed
during shooting.

O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Electronic Viewfinder

1

NO

C

Before You Begin

D

E

L M

RS

PQ

V W

TU

Y

Z

a b

8
FG H IJK

7

c

X

d
e
6
5
4
3

f

g
h

2

1
0

i

z

ut
y xw v s r

14

q po

n

m

l kj

Camera Displays

1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORSMODE(EVF).
3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.

15

1
Before You Begin

A Crop factor .....................................................199 e Date and time..................................47, 49, 291
B IS mode 2 .........................................................182 f Touch screen mode .............................. 28, 170
C Movie compression .....................................196 g Temperature warning ......................... 40, 407
D Focus check ............................................ 95, 166 h Control lock 3 .................................................322
E Depth-of-ﬁeld preview...........................80, 94 i Boost mode ...................................................323
F Flash (TTL) mode .........................................360 j Power supply....................................................44
G Flash compensation ...................................360 k Histogram .........................................................24
H Self-timer indicator ............................174, 195 l Battery level ......................................................46
I Continuous mode........................................109 m Sensitivity ..........................................................97
J Shutter type ...................................................176 n Exposure compensation ............................100
K AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................164 o Aperture...............................................73, 79, 81
L Bluetooth ON/OFF
p Distance indicator 2 ........................................94
M Wireless connection
q Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 81
N White balance ..............................................134 r TTL lock ..................................................185, 342
O AWB lock ........................................................318 s AE lock....................................................103, 318
P Film simulation ............................................130 t Metering ............................................................99
Q F-Log/HLG recording ..................................200 u Shooting mode ...............................................68
R Dynamic range ............................................138 v Focus mode 2 ....................................................84
S D-range priority ...........................................139 w Focus indicator 2 ..............................................85
T Bluetooth host ..............................................258 x Manual focus indicator 2 .......................84, 92
U AirGlu BT connection ..................................225 y AF lock....................................................103, 318
V Movie mode ........................................... 60, 193 z Time code.......................................................223
W High-speed recording indicator ..............194 0 Microphone input channel..............190, 222
X Recording time available/
1 Recording level 2 ...........................................219
elapsed recording time ..............................60 2 Exposure indicator................................ 81, 100
Y Destination for movie recording .............195 3 Virtual horizon.................................................25
Z Number of available frames 1...................408 4 Focus frame ............................................ 88, 102
a Image size ......................................................126 5 Location data download status.....258, 327
b File format......................................................196 6 Frame.io connection status ......................273
c Image quality................................................127 7 Image transfer status ........................258, 279
d HEIF format ...................................................129 8 Frame.io upload progress..........................270

The LCD Monitor

D
A

1

B

F

G H

E

IJ

L

K

C

M
N

Q
O P

R

S T
UV W

Before You Begin

9
8
7
6
5
4

X
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
e
f

3

2
1
0

g
vu
z y x w

16

ts

r

q

po n ml k jihCamera Displays

1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORSMODE(LCD).
3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls.
4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.

17

1
Before You Beginf Boost mode ...................................................323
A Wireless connection
B Bluetooth ON/OFF
g Touch zoom 3 ....................................................32
C Crop factor .....................................................199 h Temperature warning ......................... 40, 407
D Image transfer status ........................258, 279 i Control lock 4..................................................322
E Frame.io upload progress..........................270 j Battery level ......................................................46
F Movie compression .....................................196 k Power supply....................................................44
G Focus check ............................................ 95, 166 l Sensitivity ..........................................................97
H Depth-of-ﬁeld preview...........................80, 94 m Histogram .........................................................24
I Bluetooth host ..............................................258 n Exposure compensation ............................100
J AirGlu BT connection ..................................225 o Distance indicator 2 ........................................94
K Location data download status.....258, 327 p Aperture...............................................73, 79, 81
L Movie mode ........................................... 60, 193 q Time code.......................................................223
M High-speed recording indicator ..............194 r Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 81
N Focus frame ............................................ 88, 102 s TTL lock ..................................................185, 342
O Recording time available/t AE lock....................................................103, 318
elapsed recording time ..............................60 u Metering ............................................................99
P Date and time..................................47, 49, 291 v Shooting mode ...............................................68
Q Destination for movie recording .............195 w Focus mode 2 ....................................................84
R Number of available frames 1 ...................408 x Focus indicator 2 ..............................................85
S Image size ......................................................126 y Manual focus indicator 2 .......................84, 92
T File format......................................................196 z AF lock....................................................103, 318
U Image quality................................................127 0 Microphone input channel..............190, 222
V HEIF format ...................................................129 1 AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................164
W Touch screen mode 3 ............................ 28, 170 2 Shutter type ...................................................176
X AWB lock ........................................................318 3 Recording level 2 ...........................................219
Y White balance ..............................................134 4 Continuous mode........................................109
Z Film simulation ............................................130 5 Self-timer indicator ............................174, 195
a F-Log/HLG recording ..................................200 6 Exposure indicator................................ 81, 100b Dynamic range ............................................138 7 Frame.io connection status ......................273
c D-range priority ...........................................139 8 Flash (TTL) mode .........................................360
d Movie optimized control 3.............................30 9 Flash compensation ...................................360
e Virtual horizon.................................................25 A IS mode 2 .........................................................182

Choosing a Display ModeUse D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING to choose fromthe following display modes. You can choose separate display
modes for shooting and playback.

N You can also assign VIEW MODE SETTING to a function button anduse it to switch between the EVF and LCD monitor.

1
Before You Begin

SHOOTING
OptionE EYE SENSOR
r LCD ONLYQ EVF ONLYQ EVF ONLY + E

t EYE SENSOR +LCD IMAGE DISP.

Description
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns the viewﬁnder
on and the LCD monitor oﬀ ; taking your eye away turns
the viewﬁnder oﬀ and LCD monitor on.
LCD monitor on, viewﬁnder oﬀ.
Viewﬁnder on, LCD monitor oﬀ.
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns the viewﬁnder
on; taking it away turns the viewﬁnder oﬀ. The LCD
monitor remains oﬀ.
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder during shooting
turns the viewﬁnder on, but the LCD monitor is used forthe display of images once you remove your eye fromthe viewﬁnder after shooting. The options selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP. apply to display
in the LCD monitor. This setting cannot be selected
while shooting movies.

N Go to D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING > SHOOTING in
the setup menu and press the Q button to choose the view modes
available.

18Camera Displays

PLAYBACK
OptionE EYE SENSOR
r LCD ONLYQ EVF ONLY

Description
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns the viewﬁnder
on and the LCD monitor oﬀ ; taking your eye away turns
the viewﬁnder oﬀ and LCD monitor on.
LCD monitor on, viewﬁnder oﬀ.
Viewﬁnder on, LCD monitor oﬀ.

1
Before You Begin

The Eye Sensor• The eye sensor may respond to objects otherthan your eye or to light shining directly on
the sensor.
• The eye sensor is not available when the LCD
monitor is tilted.
Eye sensor

19Adjusting Display Brightness
The brightness and saturation of the viewfinder and LCD monitor
can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu.
Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfinder
brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do
the same for the LCD monitor.

1
Before You Begin

Display Rotation
When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATEDISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor automatically rotate to match camera orientation.

20

Camera Displays

The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the displayof indicators in the viewfinder and LCD
monitor.

the EVF display, place your eye to the viewfinder while using the
DISP/BACK button.

ViewﬁnderStandard indicators

Full screen(no indicators)

21

1
Before You Begin

N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be selected separately. To choose

LCD Monitor
Standard indicators

No indicators

1
Before You Begin

Info display(still photography only)22

Camera Displays

Customizing Display Indicators
To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:

1 Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.

Select D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the
setup menu.

2 Choose items.

1• FRAMING GUIDELINE• FOCUS FRAME• FOCUS INDICATOR• AF DISTANCE INDICATOR• MF DISTANCE INDICATOR• HISTOGRAM• LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT• SHOOTING MODE
• APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO• INFORMATION BACKGROUND• Expo. Comp. (Digit)• Expo. Comp. (Scale)• FOCUS MODE
• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLASH• CONTINUOUS MODE

Before You Begin

Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.

• DUAL IS MODE
• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• WHITE BALANCE• FILM SIMULATION• DYNAMIC RANGE• BOOST MODE
• FRAMES REMAINING• IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY• MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME
• DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
• COMMUNICATION STATUS• MIC LEVEL• GUIDANCE MESSAGE• NO STORAGE MEDIA WARNING• DATE/TIME• BATTERY LEVEL• FRAMING OUTLINE

3 Press DISP/BACK to save changes.

23

Framing Outline
Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see
against dark backgrounds.
Histograms
Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness isshown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis.

1

Number of pixels

Before You Begin

Shadows

Highlights
Pixel brightness• Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curvethroughout the tone range.

• Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of
the graph.

• Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of
the graph.

To view separate RGB histograms and a display showing areas of the frame that will beoverexposed at current settings superimposedon the view through the lens, press the function button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned(P 311, 339).

A Overexposed areas blink
B RGB histograms

24Camera Displays

Virtual Horizon
Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be chosen using D SCREEN SET-UP > ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING.
Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it ona tripod or the like.
2D
3D

1

Roll

• OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed.
• 2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted
left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level.
The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back.
• 3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or
right and forward or back.

N ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button
and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays.

25

Before You Begin

Pitch

Using the Menus
To display the menus, press MENU/OK.

1
Before You Begin

The Menus
Different menus are displayed during still photography, movie
recording, and playback.
Still Photography
The photo menus are displayed when asetting other than MOVIE is selected in
the drive mode options.

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTINGFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECT
EXIT

Movie Recording
The movie menus are displayed when
MOVIE is selected in the drive mode options.

MOVIE SETTING

MOVIE SETTING LIST
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
FSELF-TIMERMEDIA REC SETTINGHDMI OUTPUT SETTINGFIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
EXIT

Playback
The playback menus are displayed during
playback.

PLAY BACK MENU

RAW CONVERSIONHEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
CROP
RESIZEPROTECT
IMAGE ROTATEVOICE MEMO SETTING
EXIT

26

Using the Menus

Selecting a Menu Tab
To navigate the menus:

1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus.
1
Before You Begin

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTINGFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECT
EXIT

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTINGFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECT

to highlight the tab for the current
menu.

EXIT

Tab

3 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab containing the desired item.

4 Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu.

N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page throughmenus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items.

27

Touch Screen Mode
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen.

1
Before You Begin

Shooting Touch Controls
To enable touch controls, select ON for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN SETTING > x TOUCH SCREENSETTING.

TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGSTOUCH SCREEN SETTINGDOUBLE TAP SETTINGON
TOUCH FUNCTIONOFF
TOUCH ZOOMTOUCH SCREEN SETTINGEVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS

EVF
The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pictures are being framed in the electronic viewfinder (EVF). Use
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF
TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the monitor employed for touch controls.

N • When FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, you can choose the face used
for focus.
• You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferentially focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF
SETTING > SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.

28

Touch Screen ModeLCD Monitor
The operation performed can be selectedby tapping the touch screen mode indicator in the display. Touch controls can beused for the following operations:Mode

1

Description• In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap yourAF

AF OFFsubject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AF OFF icon.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.

AREA

Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.

OFF

Touch screen mode oﬀ.

O • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.

• Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 171).
N • To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, se-lect OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING >x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
• Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls available during movie recording, see “Movie Recording (F TOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 216)”.

29

Before You Begin

Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
TOUCH
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your ﬁnger
SHOOTING
on the display.

1
Before You Begin

MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING >MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ortapping the movie-optimized mode button in the shooting display optimizes thecommand dials and touch controls formovie recording. This can be used to prevent camera sounds being recorded withmovie footage.

Movie-optimized
mode button• SHUTTER SPEED• APERTURE• EXPOSURE COMPENSATION• F ISO• INTERNAL MIC LEVEL• WIND FILTER• HEADPHONES VOLUME• F FILM SIMULATION• F WHITE BALANCE• F IS MODE
ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC • F IS MODE BOOSTLEVEL ADJUSTMENTN • Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring.

• When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized mode

button can be used to change shooting settings or disable movie-optimized control.
• EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT can be set only when an external
mic is connected.

30

Touch Screen Mode

Touch Function
Functions can be assigned to the following flick gestures in much the same way
as function buttons (P 339):• Flick up: T-Fn1• Flick left: T-Fn2• Flick right: T-Fn3• Flick down: T-Fn4
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
L

tures display a menu; tap to select thedesired option.

R

0
-6
-12
-20

-40
-50
dB

SET

CANCEL• Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable
touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.

31

Before You Begin

N • In some cases, touch-function flick ges-1

Touch Zoom
If the lens supports touch zoom, you canzoom in and out by touching the display.
Tap the touch zoom button in the display
to enable touch zoom.

1
Before You Begin

Touch zoom is controlled using the buttons in the display.

ButtonTouch zoom
Zoom in
Zoom out

Description
Enable touch zoom.
Zoom in or out. Touch and hold to zoom in or out at a constant
speed.

Rocker switch

The camera zooms in or out at a speed corresponding to theposition of the rocker switch.

DisableDisable touch zoom.

N The rate at which the camera zooms in and out in response to the T
and W buttons can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING > CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn).

32

Touch Screen Mode

Playback Touch Controls
When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN SETTING > a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls
can be used for the following playback operations:• Swipe: Swipe a finger across the display toview other images.

1
Before You Begin• Pinch-out: Place two fingers on the display
and spread them apart to zoom in.

• Pinch-in: Place two fingers on the display
and slide them together to zoom out.

N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but nofurther.

• Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom inon the focus point.

• Drag: View other areas of the image during
playback zoom.

33

MEMO

34

First Steps35

Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
Attach the strap to the two strap clips as shown below.

2First StepsO To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured.

36

Attaching a Lens
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
Remove the body cap from the camera
and the rear cap from the lens. Place thelens on mount, keeping the marks on thelens and camera aligned (A), and thenslowly rotate the lens in the direction of
the arrow until it clicks into place (B).

2

Removing Lenses
To remove the lens, turn the camera off, thenpress the lens release button (A) and slowly
rotate the lens as shown (B).

O To prevent dust accumulating on the lensor inside the camera, replace the lens caps
and camera body cap when the lens is not
attached.

Lenses and Other Optional Accessories
The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.

37

First StepsO • When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does
not enter the camera.
• Be careful not to touch the camera’s internal parts.
• Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place.
• Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens.

Attaching a Lens

O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (exchanging) lenses.
• Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter.
• Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright lightsource. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it tomalfunction.
• Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses.
• Do not rotate the lens while holding moving parts of the camera,such as the aperture ring.
• See the manual provided with the lens for information on use.

2
First Steps

38

Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card
Insert the battery and memory card as described below.

1 Open the battery-chamber cover.

Slide the battery-chamber coverlatch as shown and open the battery-chamber cover.

O • Do not open the battery-chamber

cover when the camera is on. Failure to observe this precaution could
damage image files or memory
cards.
• Do not use excessive force whenhandling the battery-chamber cover.

2
First Steps

2 Insert the battery as shown.
O • Insert the battery in the orientation

shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the battery upside down orbackwards.
• Confirm that the battery is securely
latched.

3 Insert the memory card.

39

4 Close the battery-chamber cover and slide the battery-chamber latch closed.

O If the cover does not close, check thatthe battery is in the correct orientation. Do not attempt to force the cover shut.

2First Steps

Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover.
To remove the battery, press the battery latch
to the side, and slide the battery out of thecamera as shown.

O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environments. Observe caution when removing the battery.

Removing Memory Cards
To remove the memory card, press it in and release it slowly. The card can then be removed
by hand.

O • Press the center of the card.
• Suddenly removing your finger from the card could cause the card to
fall from the slot. Remove your finger slowly.

• If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to thetouch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it.

40

Inserting the Battery and a Memory Card

Compatible Memory Cards• The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory
cards. Both the UHS-I and UHS-II bus interfaces are supported.
• UHS-II cards are recommended for high-speed burst photography.
• The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording varywith the settings selected (P 63).
• A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fujifilm
website. For details, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted fromthe card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
• Memory cards can be locked, making it
impossible to format the card or to record
or delete images. Before inserting a memory card, slide the write-protect switch tothe unlocked position.
• Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach ofchildren. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance
immediately.
• miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory
cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the camera to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove
the card.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels
can cause camera malfunction.
• Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card.
• Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which
pictures are stored when a picture is taken for the first time. Do notrename or delete this folder or use a computer or other device toedit, delete, or rename image files. Always use the camera to delete
pictures; before editing or renaming files, copy them to a computerand edit or rename the copies, not the originals. Renaming the files
on the camera can cause problems during playback.

41

2
First StepsO • Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memo-Charging the Battery
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery
before use.

O An NP-W126S rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera.

• The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available
with computers with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface.

2
First Steps

Leave the computer on during charging.

O • The battery will not charge while the camera is on.
• Connect the supplied USB cable.
• Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub
or keyboard.

• Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume

charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect theUSB cable.
• Charging may not be supported depending on the model of computer, computer settings, and the computer’s current state.
• The battery takes about 300 minutes to charge with a charging input of 5 V/500 mA.

• To charge the battery from a household AC power outlet, use aBC-W126S battery charger (available separately).

42

Charging the Battery

Charge Status
The indicator lamp shows battery charge status
as follows:

Battery status
Battery charging
Charging complete
Charging error

2First Steps

Indicator lamp
On
Oﬀ
Blinks43

Charging the BatteryO • Do not use the supplied USB cable with other devices, as this could
cause malfunction.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe
this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery fromthe camera.
• Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat.
• Read the cautions in “The Battery and Power Supply”.
• Use only genuine Fujifilm rechargeable batteries designated for use
in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in product malfunction.
• Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel
the outer casing.
• The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge thebattery one or two days before use.
• If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its
charging life and must be replaced.
• Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure
to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging.
• Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures.
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth
ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu increases the drain on
the battery.

2First StepsN • If the camera is turned on during charging,charging will end and the USB connection
will instead be used to power the camera.
The battery level will begin to gradually
decline (P 288).
• The camera will display a “power supply” icon when powered via USB.

44

Turning the Camera On and Off
Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off.
Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera
on, or to OFF to turn the camera off.

O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfinder can affect picN • Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
• The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed

for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT >AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off
automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF
switch to OFF and then back to ON.

45

First Stepstures or the view through the viewfinder. Keep the lens and viewfinderclean.

2

Checking the Battery Level
After turning the camera on, check the battery level in thedisplay.
Battery level is shown as follows:2
First Steps

Indicator
e
f
g
h
i
i
(red)
j
(blinks red)46

Description
Battery partially discharged.
Battery about 80% full.
Battery about 60% full.
Battery about 40% full.
Battery about 20% full.
Low battery. Charge as soon as possible.
Battery exhausted. Turn camera oﬀ and recharge battery.

Basic Setup
When you turn the camera on for the first time, you canchoose a language and set the camera clock. Follow thesteps below when turning the camera on for the first time.

1 Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.

2First Steps

2 Choose a language.
Highlight a language and press
MENU/OK.

3 Choose a time zone.
When prompted, choose a time zone
and turn daylight savings time on
or off using the focus stick (focus lever), then highlight SET and press
MENU/OK.

AREA SETTINGBERLIN/PARIS

AREA SETTING

GMT ±0:00

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
SET

OFF
NO

N To skip this step, press DISP/BACK.

47

4 Set the clock.
Press MENU/OK to proceed to the next
step.

DATE/TIME

GMT +1:00 BERLIN/PARIS

MM/DD/YYYY.MM.DD 2024 . 12 . 31

12 00

DD.MM.YY

SET

2

NO

5 View information on the smartphone app.

• The camera will display a QR code

First Steps

you can scan with your smartphone
to open a website where you candownload the smartphone app.
• Press MENU/OK to proceed to thenext step.

APPLICATIONIMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERREDTO THE SMARTPHONE.

SCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP.

SETN Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera
or control the camera remotely (P 258).

6 Choose an AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

• The selected setting determines

the temperature at which the camera will turn off automatically.
• Press MENU/OK to exit to the shooting display.

AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

STANDARDHIGH
SET THE "AUTO POWER OFF TEMP." TO "HIGH" TO EXTEND
THE RECORDING TIME. ONLY RECOMMENDED
WHEN NOT HANDHELD OR WHEN USING TRIPOD ETC.
SET

7 Format the memory card (P 290).

O Format memory cards before first use, and be sure to reformat all
memory cards after using them in a computer or other device.

N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will

be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when thecamera is turned on.

48

Basic Setup

Choosing a Different Language
To change the language:

1 Display language options.

Select D USER SETTING > Qa.

2 Choose a language.

Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.

Changing the Time and Date
To set the camera clock:2
First Steps

1 Display DATE/TIME options.

Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME.

2 Set the clock.

Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight theyear, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down tochange. Press MENU/OK to set the clock.

49

MEMO

50

Basic Photography andPlayback

51

Taking Photographs
This section explains basic photography.

1 Rotate the auto mode selector lever
to AUTO to view the shooting display
for Y mode.

The camera will display the type ofscene and focus target detected.

3
Basic Photography and Playback

O In Y (AUTO) mode, the camera continuously adjusts focus andsearches for eyes, increasing the drain on the battery; in addition,
the sound of the camera focusing may be audible.

2 Ready the camera.
Hold the camera steady with both
hands—shaking or unsteady hands
can blur your shots.

To prevent pictures that are out of focus or too dark (underexposed), keep
your fingers and other objects awayfrom the lens and AF-assist illuminator.

52

Taking Photographs

3 Frame the picture.

Lenses with Zoom Rings
Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in
the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom
out, right to zoom in.
A

4 Focus.

Press the shutter button halfway tofocus.

3

Focus frame• If the camera is able to focus, the focus frame and focus indicator
will glow green.

• If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, swill be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white.

N • If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light toassist the focus operation.
• Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is pressedhalfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the button is
kept in this position (AF/AE lock).
• The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macroand standard focus ranges for the lens.

5 Shoot.

Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down
to take the picture.

53

Basic Photography and Playback

Focus indicatorViewing Pictures
Pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
To view pictures full frame, press a.
100-0001

3
Basic Photography and Playback

Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (focus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Pressthe focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order
recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus
stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame.

N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (“gift image”)

icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playbackzoom may not be available.

54Viewing Pictures

HDMI Output
Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI
devices.
Connecting to HDMI Devices
Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using athird-party HDMI cable.

1 Turn the camera off.
2 Connect the cable as shown below.
3
Basic Photography and Playback

Insert into
HDMI connector

Insert into HDMI Microconnector (Type D)

3 Configure the device for HDMI input as described in the documentation supplied with the device.

4 Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will

be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns off
in playback mode (P 56).

O • Making sure the connectors are fully inserted.
• Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5 m (4.9 ft.) long.

55

Viewing Pictures

Shooting
Display live view or movie footage on a TV or save it to an external recorder that supports HDMI input.
Playback
To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera monitor turns off and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI
device. Note that the camera volume controls have no effect onsounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls toadjust the volume.

3

N Some televisions may briefly display a black screen when movie playback begins.

Basic Photography and Playback

56Deleting Pictures
Use the b button to delete pictures.

O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures orcopy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.

1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button andselect FRAME.

ERASE

FRAME
SELECTED FRAMESALL FRAMES

3

pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a confirmation dialog is
not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures.

N • Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any
pictures you wish to delete (P 242).
• Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACKMENU > ERASE option (P 238).

57

Basic Photography and Playback

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through

MEMO

58

Movie Recording andPlayback

59

Recording Movies
This section describes how to film movies in auto mode.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and select
MOVIE.

2 Rotate the auto mode selector lever
to AUTO.

4
Movie Recording and Playback

3 Press the shutter button all the way

down.
Recording will start.
• A recording indicator (V) is displayed while recording is in progress.
• The borders of the display turn Recording time
red during movie recording, green
Time remaining
during high-speed recording.
• The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while
another display counts up to show the recording time.

4 Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends
automatically when the maximum length is reached or the
memory card is full.

60

Recording Movies

O • Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external
microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
• Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds
made by the camera during recording.

• Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very
bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

N • To maximize recording time:- keep the camera out of direct sunlight as much as possible, and- turn the camera off any time it is not in use.
• To monitor audio with headphones during recording, you will need

61

4
Movie Recording and Playback

to convert the USB connector to an audio jack using the supplied
headphone adapter.
• The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIESETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp—
indicator or AF-assist—that lights during movie recording andwhether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you
can change exposure compensation by up to ±2 EV and adjust zoom
using the zoom ring on the lens (if available).
• To prevent the borders of the display changing color during movie recording, select OFF for B MOVIE SETTING > F REC FRAME
INDICATOR.
• While recording is in progress, you can:- Adjust sensitivity (when the auto mode selector lever is in v)- Refocus using any of the following methods (when the auto mode
selector lever is in v):• Press the shutter button halfway• Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned• Use touch screen controls- Display a histogram or artificial horizon by pressing the button towhich HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been assigned• Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases
settings may not apply during recording.
• To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF
SETTING > FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) andrear command dial (P 88).

Temperature Warnings
The camera automatically turns off to protect itself when its temperature or
the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed,
image noise may increase. Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before
turning it on again.
Using an External Microphone
Sound can be recorded with external microphones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm indiameter; microphones that require plug-in
power cannot be used. See the microphone
manual for details.

4

XLR Microphone Adapters
The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone
adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website.
https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website

Movie Recording and Playback62

Recording Movies

O • Changes made using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photomenus also apply to the movie menus. Changes made in one set ofmenus automatically apply in the other.
• The type of memory card supported varies with the option select for
B MOVIE SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.
- Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mbps can be recorded to cards with aVideo Speed Class of V60 or better.
- Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to cards
with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better.

Depth of Field
To soften backgrounds, set aperture as wide as possible. Aperture can be
adjusted manually at settings other than A.

63

4
Movie Recording and Playback

Adjusting Movie Settings
Movie settings can be adjusted from the movie menus or using
the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus (P 26).
• Use the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus to quickly
adjust settings when recording movies via a button to which
MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE has been assigned (P 187).
• Use the movie menus to adjust settings when recording movies
via the shutter button after choosing MOVIE in the drive mode
options (P 192).
• Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted using MOVIE MODE.
• Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the file
type, bit rate, and destination.
• When the auto mode selector lever is in v, focus mode formovie recording can be selected using the focus mode selector. Regardless of the option selected, the camera will automatically switch to focus mode C (continuous AF) when FACE
DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is chosen for
G AF/MF SETTING > g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. Note, however, that choosing focus mode M when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected disables face and subject detection.

Viewing Movies
View movies on the camera.
Any movie selected after the a button ispressed to begin playback will be indicated by a W icon. Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to start movie playback.

PLAY

AUDIO SET.

The following operations can be performed while a movie is displayed:

4
Movie Recording and Playback

Focus stick(focus lever) Full-frame playback
View photoUpinformation
Down
Start playback

Pause playback

Left/right

Adjust speed

View other pictures

Playback inprogress ((xx)

Playback
paused (y(y)

End playback
Start/resume playback
Single frame rewind/advance

Progress is shown in the display during
playback.

STOP

64

PAUSE

Viewing Movies

O Do not cover the speaker during playback.
N • Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Pressthe focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press
MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.
• To listen to audio with headphones, you will need to convert the USB
connector to an audio jack using the supplied headphone adapter.
• To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in thecamera monitor, press the a button (P 55).

Playback Speed
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right toadjust playback speed during playback. Speedis shown by the number of arrows (M or N).

29m59s4
Movie Recording and Playback

Arrows

65

MEMO

66

Taking Photographs

67Choosing a Shooting Mode
Modes P, S, A, and M can be selected via adjustments toshutter speed and/or aperture. In auto mode (AUTO), you
can let the camera automatically recognize the scene andthe subject to adjust settings, or you can choose the scene
yourself.
Y (AUTO)The camera automatically detects the subject and adjusts focus
and chooses a scene mode appropriately.
Rotate the auto mode selector lever to
AUTO to view the shooting display for Y
mode.

5
Taking Photographs

The camera automatically displays icons
showing the selected scene and the typeof subject selected for focus.

Subject
Scene

68

Choosing a Shooting Mode

Icon

Scene

Subject• C : LANDSCAPE• d : NIGHT• h : NIGHT (TRIPOD)• e : MACRO• Q : SUNSET• x : SKY• y : GREENERY• gu : PORTRAIT• E : ANIMAL• F : BIRD
• G : AUTOMOBILE

Description• h : PORTRAIT• g : BACKLIT PORTRAIT• c : MOVING OBJECT• a : PORTRAIT&MOTION• b : BACKLIT PORTRAIT&MOTION• H : MOTORCYCLE&BIKE• I : AIRPLANE• J : TRAIN

O • The mode selected may vary with shooting conditions. The camera
may also choose different modes for the same scene depending on
shooting conditions. If the mode chosen by the camera does notmatch the actual scene, you can choose a different mode.
• The additional processing time required in some scene modes may
increase save times.
of scene.

69

Taking Photographs

N No icon will be displayed if the camera is unable to determine the type

5

Choosing a Scene Mode
After rotating the auto mode selector lever to AUTO, you can rotate the front command dial to choose from the scene modes
listed below, optimizing camera settings for the selected subject
type.
Scene

5
Taking Photographs

Description
The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit the
Y AUTO
scene and subject.
Choose for portraits.
h PORTRAIT
Processes portraits to give the subject a smooth, natuZ PORTRAIT ENHANCER
ral-looking complexion.
Choose for daylight shots of buildings and landscapes.
M LANDSCAPE
Choose when photographing moving subjects.
N SPORT
Choose for poorly lit twilight or night scenes.
O NIGHT
Choose this mode for slow shutter speeds when shootH NIGHT (TRIPOD)
ing at night.
Slow shutter speeds are used to capture the expandingp FIREWORKS
burst of light from a ﬁrework.
Choose this mode to record the vivid colors in sunrises
Q SUNSETand sunsets.
Choose for crisp, clear shots that capture the brightness
R SNOWof scenes dominated by shining white snow.
Choose for crisp, clear shots that capture the brightness
s BEACH
of sunlit beaches.
Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underf UNDERWATER
water lighting.
Capture indoor background lighting under low-light
U PARTY
conditions.
Eﬀective for taking more vivid shots of ﬂowers.
V FLOWER
Take clear pictures of text or drawings in print.
W TEXT

70

Choosing a Shooting ModeN • You can also choose the scene mode via A SHOOTING SETTING >AUTO MODE SETTING.
• When p FIREWORKS is chosen, use the rear command dial tochange the shutter speed when the shutter speed dial is rotated to2, 1, or T.

5
Taking Photographs

71Mode P: Program AE
Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can beselected with program shift.

1 Rotate the auto mode selector lever
to z.

2 Slide the lens aperture mode switch
to A.

5
Taking Photographs

3 Rotate the shutter speed dial to A.

P will appear in the display.

72

Choosing a Shooting ModeO • If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed and aperture displays will show “– – –”.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, select AUTO for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE SETTING.

Program ShiftIf desired, you can rotate the rear command dial
to select other combinations of shutter speed
and aperture without altering exposure (program shift).

Aperture
Shutter speed

O Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:• When TTL is selected for F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING• When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING >Taking Photographs

DYNAMIC RANGE

5• In movie mode

N To cancel program shift, turn the camera off.

73

Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE
Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for
optimal exposure.

1 Rotate the auto mode selector lever
to z.

2 Slide the lens aperture mode switch
to A.

5

3 Rotate the shutter speed dial to se-

Taking Photographs

lect a shutter speed.

S will appear in the display.

74

Choosing a Shooting ModeO • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter
speed, aperture will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aperture display will show “– – –”.

• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, select AUTO for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE SETTING.

N • Shutter speed can also be adjusted in increments of 1⁄3 EV by rotating
the rear command dial.
• Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or
the shutter button is pressed halfway.

• At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be
displayed while the exposure is in progress.

• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for

H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
• The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a longtime-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended.
• The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

5
Taking Photographs

75

Time (T)
Choose a shutter speed of T (time) for long time-exposures.
Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent the camera moving
during the exposure.

1 Set shutter speed to T.

2 Rotate the rear command dial tochoose a shutter speed.

5
Taking Photographs

3 Press the shutter button all the way down to take a picture
at the selected shutter speed. At speeds of 1 s or slower, acount-down timer will be displayed while the exposure is inprogress.

N To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that thismay increase the time needed to record images after shooting.

76

Choosing a Shooting Mode

Bulb (B)
Choose a shutter speed of B (bulb) for long time-exposures inwhich you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod
is recommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure.

1 Set shutter speed to B.

2 Press the shutter button all the way down.

• The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the
shutter button is pressed.

• The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure

O Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL

IMAGE or multiple exposure or when the electronic shutter is selected
for A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.

N • Selecting an aperture of A fixes shutter speed at 30 s.
• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for

H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.

77

5
Taking Photographs

started.
• Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending theexposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display
the processing time remaining.

Using a Remote Release
A remote release can be used for long time-exposures. When using an optional RR-100 remote release or an electronic release fromthird-party suppliers, connect it to the camera’s
microphone/remote release connector via athird-party ⌀2.5 mm to 3.5 mm adapter.

N A confirmation dialog will be displayedwhen a remote release is connected; press
MENU/OK and select n REMOTE for MIC/REMOTE RELEASE.

5Taking Photographs

78

CHECK MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
SETTING
SET
SKIP

Choosing a Shooting Mode

Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE
Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for
optimal exposure.

1 Rotate the auto mode selector leverto z.

2 Rotate the shutter speed dial to A.

5
Taking Photographs

3 Slide the lens aperture mode switch
to Z.

A will appear in the display.

79

4 Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.
N • If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, aperture can be
adjusted using the front command dial on the camera.

• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperturering is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating thefront command dial.
• The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture,
shutter speed will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed display will show “– – –”.

N Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressedhalfway.

5
Taking Photographs

Previewing Depth of Field
When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned
to a function button, pressing the button displays a L icon and stops aperture down to theselected setting, allowing depth of field to bepreviewed in the display (P 339).

80

Choosing a Shooting Mode

Mode M: Manual Exposure
In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative expression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached.

1 Rotate the auto mode selector lever
to z.

2 Slide the lens aperture mode switch
to Z.

5
Taking Photographs

3 Rotate the shutter speed dial to select a shutter speed other than A.

M will appear in the display.

81

Choosing a Shooting Mode

4 Rotate the shutter speed dial to choose a shutter speed andthe lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.

N • The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicatorthat shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at current settings.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, aperture can be
adjusted using the front command dial on the camera.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperturering is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating thefront command dial.
• The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

Exposure Preview
To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for
D SCREEN SET-UP > PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE.

5
Taking Photographs

N Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the flash

or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the picture is taken.

82Autofocus
Take pictures using autofocus.

1 Rotate the focus mode selector to S
or C (P 84).

2 Use G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE to choose an AF mode
(P 86).
3 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS
AREA and choose the position andsize of the focus frame (P 88).

5
Taking Photographs

4 Take pictures.

83

Focus ModeUse the focus mode selector to choose
how the camera focuses.

Choose from the following options:
Mode

S(AF-S)C(AF-C)

M
5(manual)Description
Single AF: Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Choose for stationary subjects.
Continuous AF: Focus is continually adjusted to reﬂect changes in the
distance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Use for subjects that are in motion.
Manual: Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manualcontrol of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus (P 92).

Taking Photographs

N • Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.
• If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF, focus will be ad-justed continuously in modes S and C even when the shutter button
is not pressed.

84

Autofocus

The Focus Indicator
Focus status is shown by the focus indicator.

Focus indicator

Focus indicator( )z(lights green)(z)(lights green)A(blinks white)j

Focus status
Camera focusing.
Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode S).
Subject in focus (focus mode C). Focus is automatically adjusted for changes in distance to subject.
Camera unable to focus.
Manual focus (focus mode M).

5
Taking Photographs

85

Autofocus Options (AF Mode)
Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the
combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes.

1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE.
3 Choose an AF mode.
How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode.
Focus Mode S (AF-S)
OptionDescription

Sample image

Camera focuses on subject inselected focus point. Use for pinSINGLE POINT point focus on selected subject.

r

5Taking Photographs

y
ZONE

z
WIDE

j
ALL

86

Camera focuses on subject in selected focus zone. Focus zones include multiple focus points, making it easier to focus on subjects inmotion.

Camera focuses automatically on
high-contrast subjects; display
shows areas in focus.

Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 88, 90) to cycle through the AF modes selected for
G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE ALL SETTING.

Autofocus

Focus Mode C (AF-C)
OptionDescription

Sample image

Focus tracks subject at selected focus point. Use for subjects moving
SINGLE POINT toward or away from camera.

r

y
ZONE

z

j
ALL

5

Focus tracks subjects moving
through wide area of frame.

Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 88, 90) to cycle through the AF modes selected for
G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE ALL SETTING.

87

Taking Photographs

TRACKING

Camera tracks focus in selected focus zone. Use for subjects that are
moving fairly predictably.

Focus-Point Selection
Viewing the Focus-Point Display

1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the focus-point display.

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial tochoose a focus area.

N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 28).

5
Taking Photographs

88Autofocus

Selecting a Focus Point
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
the focus point and the rear commanddial to choose the size of the focus frame.
The procedure varies with the option selected for AF mode.
Focus stick

Rear command dial

AF mode
Tilt

Press

Select focus
point

Select center
focus point

r
y

Press

Choose from 6 Restore originalframe sizes
size

5
—

N • Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING
is selected in focus mode S.
• You can also press the DISP/BACK button to return the focus area to thecenter.

• If j ALL is selected for AF mode, you can rotate the rear command dialin the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modes in the following order: r SINGLE POINT (6 frame sizes), y ZONE (3 frame sizes),
ZONE CUSTOM 1, ZONE CUSTOM 2, ZONE CUSTOM 3, and z WIDE/TRACKING. Select G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE ALL SETTING tochoose the AF modes available.

89

Taking Photographsz

Rotate

The Focus-Point Display
The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF
mode.

N • Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by thelarge squares.
• The dimensions of ZONE CUSTOM 1, ZONE CUSTOM 2, and ZONECUSTOM 3 can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING > ZONECUSTOM SETTING.

r SINGLE POINT

5

AF modey ZONEz WIDE/TRACKINGTaking Photographs

Number of points avail- Choose from zones with Position focus frame overable can be selected using 7 × 7, 5 × 5, or 3 × 3 focus subject you want to track
G AF/MF SETTING > points or from ZONE
using continuous AF.
NUMBER OF FOCUS CUSTOM 1, ZONEPOINTS.
CUSTOM 2, and ZONECUSTOM 3.
Autofocus
Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may beunable to focus on the subjects listed below.
• Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies.
• Subjects photographed through a window or other reflective object.
• Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than reflect light, such as
hair or fur.
• Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or flame.
• Subjects that show little contrast with the background.
• Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is
also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a
backdrop of highly contrasting elements).

90

Autofocus

Checking Focus
To zoom in on the current focus area for precise
focus, press the center of the rear commanddial. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
another focus area. Press the center of the rearcommand dial again to cancel zoom.

Normal display

Focus zoom

N • In focus mode S, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear commanddial.
• The focus stick can be used to select the focus area while zoom is in

91

5
Taking Photographs

effect.
• In focus mode S, select r SINGLE POINT for AF MODE.
• Focus zoom is not available in focus mode C or when G AF/MF
SETTING > PRE-AF is on.
• Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING tochange the function performed by the center of the rear commanddial. You can also assign its default function to other controls (P 339).

Manual Focus
Adjust focus manually.

1 Rotate the focus mode selector to M.

j will appear in the display.

5

2 Focus manually using the lens focus

Taking Photographs

ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce
the focus distance, right to increase.
A

3 Take pictures.

N • Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING >FOCUS RING ROTATE to reverse the direction of rotation of the focus
ring.
• Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.

92

Manual Focus

Quick Focus• To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press

the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size ofthe focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial).
• In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a chosen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option
chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > xF INSTANT AF SETTING.

5
Taking Photographs

93

Checking Focus
A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual
focus mode.
The Manual Focus Indicator
The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the focus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP > FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu),
the blue bar the depth of field, or in other words the distance infront of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus.
Focus distance(white line)

Depth of field

5
Taking Photographs

N • If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR

are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depthof-field indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button todisplay standard indicators.
• Use the G AF/MF SETTING > xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option
to choose how depth of field is displayed. Choose FILM FORMATBASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of field for
pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS tohelp you assess depth of field for pictures that will be viewed at highresolutions on computers or other electronic displays.

94

Manual Focus

Focus Zoom
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK, thecamera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area
when the focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the rear command dial to exit zoom.

N While zoom is in effect, the focus stick can be used to select the focus
area and zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial.
However, a focus area cannot be moved or zoom cannot be adjusted
when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL MICROPRISM is selected for
MF assist.

MF Assist
Use G AF/MF SETTING > MF ASSIST (P 165) in the photomenus or G AF/MF SETTING > F MF ASSIST (P 214) in themovie menus to choose a focus check option.

center of the rear command dial.

• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image

in the center of the frame. Frame thesubject in the split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four partsof the split image are correctly aligned.

• DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern thatemphasizes blur is displayed when thesubject is out of focus, disappearing to
be replaced by a sharp image when thesubject is in focus.

95

5
Taking Photographs

N • The focus check options for movies differ from those for still photography.
• The MF ASSIST menu can be displayed by pressing and holding theManual Focus• FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until
the subject is highlighted.

• FOCUS METER: A meter is displayed below

the focus point indicating whether focus is in front of or behind the subject.
The needle swings left when focus is in
front of the subject and right when it isbehind the subject. Adjust focus so theneedle is pointing straight up.

N The display reverses when Y CCW is selected for D BUTTON/DIALSETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING > FOCUS RING ROTATE.

5• FOCUS MAP: Square indicators are dis-

Taking Photographs

played in focus frames to indicate points
that are in focus and not in focus by color.
A green indicator is displayed on a pointin focus on the subject and a point thesame distance as the subject. A yellow
indicator is displayed on a point in front of the focus position, anda blue indicator is displayed on a point behind the focus position.

N • You can change the indicator colors to monochrome using G AF/

MF SETTING > F MF ASSIST in the movie menus. With this setting,a white indicator is displayed on a point in front of the focus position, and a black indicator is displayed on a point behind the focus
position.
• Indicators may not be displayed for subjects that are difficult to capture with auto focus (P 90).

96

Sensitivity
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
Set sensitivity using A SHOOTING SETTING > ISO.
Option
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO3
125–12800
L (64/80/100)
H (25600/51200)

Description
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting conditions according to combination of standard andmaximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed chosen for A SHOOTING SETTING > ISO. Choose from
AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 (P 98).
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display.
Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may appear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range.

N • Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off.
• If desired, you can use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND

Adjusting Sensitivity
High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower
values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note,however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities.

97

5
Taking Photographs

DIAL SETTING to configure the camera so that ISO sensitivity can be
adjusted using the front or rear command dial.

Sensitivity

AUTO
Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum
shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3.
Item

Options

DEFAULT SENSITIVITY
125–12800
MAX. SENSITIVITY
400–12800
MIN. SHUTTER SPEED ¼–30 SEC, AUTO

AUTO1
800

Default
AUTO2
125
3200
AUTO

AUTO3
12800

The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the default and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above thedefault value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure
would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED.

N • If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that

selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set tothe value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTERSPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected
for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will automatically adjust the minimum shutter speed according to the focal
length of the lens (the setting remains the same whether image stabilization is on or off ).

5
Taking Photographs98Metering
Choose how the camera meters exposure.
A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY offers a choice of thefollowing metering options:

O The selected option will only take effect if OFF is selected for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the
G AF/MF SETTING menu.
Mode

o
MULTI

p
CENTERWEIGHTEDvw
AVERAGE

The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest
weight to the area at the center.
The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent
to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects andin other cases in which the background is much brighter or
darker than the main subject.
Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides
consistent exposure across multiple shots with the samelighting, and is particularly eﬀective for landscapes andportraits of subjects dressed in black or white.

N To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/
MF SETTING > INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 167).

99

5
Taking Photographs

SPOT

Description
The camera instantly determines exposure based on an
analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution.
Recommended in most situations.

Exposure Compensation
Adjust exposure.
Rotate the exposure compensation dial.

O • The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode.
• Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display,although the display may not accurately reflect its effects if:- the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 EV,- W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or- STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY.
Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfinder or LCD
monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, thedisplay may not accurately reflect the effects of exposure compensation during F-Log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is selected for F DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by
selecting mode M and adjusting exposure directly.

5
Taking Photographs

100Exposure Compensation

C (Custom)
When the exposure compensation dial isrotated to C, exposure compensation canbe adjusted by rotating the front command dial.

N • The front command dial can be used to set exposure compensation
to values between −5 and +5 EV.
• The function assigned to the front command dial can be selected bypressing the dial (P 312).

5
Taking Photographs

101

Focus/Exposure Lock
Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.

1 Position the subject in the focus

frame and press the shutter button
halfway to lock focus and exposure.
Focus and exposure will remain
locked while the shutter button ispressed halfway (AF/AE lock).

2 Press the button all the way down.

N Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available

when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF,
SHUTTER AE.

5
Taking Photographs102

Focus/Exposure Lock

Other Controls
Focus and exposure can also be locked
using the AEL and AFON buttons. At default settings, you can use the AEL button
to lock exposure without locking focus.
If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCKONLY, it can similarly be used to lock focus without locking exposure.

AEL button(exposure lock)• While the assigned control is pressed,pressing the shutter button halfway will
not end the lock.
• If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > AE/
AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only beended by pressing the control a second
time.

AFON button

5

D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposureand focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 339).

103

Taking Photographs

N • The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point
during exposure lock.
• The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles usingBracketing
Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight oneof the following:

OptionW ISO BKTV WHITE BALANCE BKT

5

P
105
105

Options BracketingP
106

3 Press the focus stick left or right to highlight the desired

Taking Photographs

bracketing settings.

4 Press MENU/OK to select.
5 Take pictures.

104Bracketing

W ISO BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1⁄3, ±2⁄3, or ±1) in the drive mode
display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera will takea picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two
additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other withsensitivity lowered by the selected amount.
V WHITE BALANCE BKTSelect a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3) in the drive mode display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shotand processes it to create three copies: one at the current whitebalanced setting, one with fine-tuning increased by the selectedamount, and another with fine-tuning decreased by the selectedamount.

5
Taking Photographs105

s Bracketing
O AE BKTUse A SHOOTING SETTING > AE BKT SETTING to choose thebracketing amount, bracketing order, and number of shots. The
camera will take the specified number of shots in sequence: one
using the metered value for exposure and the others over- or under-exposed by multiples of the selected bracketing amount.

N Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed thelimits of the exposure metering system.

X FILM SIMULATION BKTEach time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot andprocesses it to create copies with different film simulation settings,
chosen using A SHOOTING SETTING > FILM SIMULATION BKT.

5
Taking Photographs

Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKTEach time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes threeshots with different dynamic ranges: 100% for the first, 200% for
the second, and 400% for the third.

N While dynamic range bracketing is in effect, sensitivity will be restricted
to a minimum of ISO 500; the sensitivity previously in effect is restored
when bracketing ends.

106Bracketing

Z FOCUS BKTEach time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a series of photos, varying focus with each shot. The A SHOOTINGSETTING > FOCUS BKT SETTING item offers a choice of MANUAL
and AUTO bracketing.

N • Do not adjust zoom during shooting.
• Use of a tripod is recommended.
MANUALIn MANUAL mode, you choose the following.
OptionFRAMESSTEPINTERVAL

Description
Choose the number of shots.
Choose the amount focus changes with each shot.
Choose the interval between shots.

Step
Frames 1

2

3

4

5

Starting focus position• Focus proceeds from the starting position toward inﬁnity.
• Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to largerchanges.

• Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reaches inﬁnity.

107

5
Taking Photographs

Focus and FRAMES/STEP
The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP
is shown in the illustration.

Bracketing

AUTO
In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP automatically.

1 Select A SHOOTING SETTING in the shooting menu, highlight FOCUS BKT SETTING, and press MENU/OK.

2 Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL.

The view through the lens will be displayed.

3 Focus on the nearest end of the subject and press MENU/OK.
The selected focus distance appears
as A on the focus distance indicator.

FOCUS BKT SETTINGSET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RINGSET POINT B

SETN The same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthestend of the subject first.

5
Taking Photographs

4 Focus on the farthest end of the sub-ject and press DISP/BACK.
The selected focus distance (B) andfocus range (A to B) appear on thefocus distance indicator.

FOCUS BKT SETTINGSET POINT B
CONTROL THE FOCUS RINGSET POINT A

SETN Instead of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK
and select A again.

5 Take photographs.

The camera will calculate values for
FRAMES and STEP automatically. The
number of frames will appear in thedisplay.

108

CANCEL

Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Capture motion in a series of pictures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.

2 If J CH HIGH SPEED BURST or O CL LOW SPEED BURST is
selected, the camera will take pictures continuously while
the shutter-release button is pressed.

Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the
memory card is full.

all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if thespace available on the memory card is insufficient.
• Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken.
• Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus
mode.
• Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the flash
may not fire.
• Recording times may increase during burst shooting.
• The choice of burst modes varies with the option selected for
A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.

109

5
Taking Photographs

O • If file numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the remaining pictures will be recorded to a new folder.
• Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record

Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)

Focus and Exposure• Select focus mode C to vary focus with shot.
• To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIALSETTING > SHUTTER AE.

N Depending on such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure compensation, exposure may not be adjusted automatically.

5
Taking Photographs

110

HDR
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes
three shots, varying exposure each time, and combinesthem into a single picture. The resulting photograph preserves details in highlights and shadows.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display thedrive mode options and select HDR.

2 Choose the amount the brightnesses of the exposures vary.
OptionHDR AUTO

HDR800+3 Take photographs.

The camera will create a combined image.

111

5
Taking Photographs

HDR200
HDR400
HDR800Description
Dynamic range is automatically set to a value of from 200%
to 800%.
Dynamic range is set to 200%.
Dynamic range is set to 400%.
Dynamic range is set to 800%.
Camera settings are adjusted for maximum variation in dynamic range.

HDR

O • Keep the camera steady.
• The desired results may not be achieved in the subject moves or thecomposition or lighting changes during shooting.

• The picture will be cropped a very small amount and the resolution
will drop slightly.

• Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value according to the scene.

• “Extended” sensitivity values are not supported.
• Depending on the options selected for HDR and sensitivity, pictures
may not be taken at the selected shutter speed.

• The flash does not fire.

N HDR images are indicated by a t icon during playback.

5
Taking Photographs

112

Multiple Exposures
Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and select
MULTIPLE EXPOSURE.

2 Choose a blend mode.
ADDITIVE

AVERAGE

BRIGHT

DARK

5

Description
The camera adds the exposures together. You may needto lower exposure compensation depending on thenumber of shots.
The camera automatically optimizes exposure for theﬁnal picture. The background in series shot withoutchanging the composition will be optimally exposed.
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
the brightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed
depending on their brightness and hue.
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
the darkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed
depending on their brightness and hue.

3 Take the first shot.

113

Taking Photographs

Option4 Press MENU/OK. The first shot will beshown superimposed on the view
through the lens and you will beprompted to take the second shot.
NEXT
RETRY

EXIT

N • To return to the previous step and retake the first shot, press thefocus stick (focus lever) left.
• To save the first shot and exit without creating a multiple exposure, press DISP/BACK.

5 Take the second shot, using the first
frame as a guide.

EXIT

6 Press MENU/OK.
5
Taking Photographs

The combined exposures will be displayed as a guide to composing thenext shot.
RETRY

EXIT

N • To return to the previous step and retake the second shot, press
the focus stick left.
• To end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots
taken to this point, press DISP/BACK.

114

Multiple Exposures

7 Make additional exposures.

Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures.

8 Press DISP/BACK to end shooting.

The camera will create the combined image and multiple exposure shooting will end.

N When the auto mode selector lever is set to AUTO, either sensitivity of
AUTO1, AUTO2, or AUTO3 can be set if ISO sensitivity is assigned to
the front command dial function (P 98).

5
Taking Photographs

115

Panoramas
Follow an on-screen guide to create a panorama.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and selectAdv. > PANORAMA.

2 To select the size of the angle through which you will pan thecamera while shooting, press the focus stick (focus lever) left.
Highlight a size and press MENU/OK.

3 Press the focus stick right to view a choice of pan directions.
Highlight a pan direction and press MENU/OK.

5

4 Press the shutter button all the way down to start recording.

Taking Photographs

There is no need to keep the shutter button pressed during
recording.

5 Pan the camera in the direction

shown by the arrow. Shooting ends
automatically when the camera ispanned to the end of the guides andthe panorama is complete.

116

Sweep camera along yellow
line in direction of
ANGLE

DIRECTION

Panoramas

For Best Results• Move the camera slowly in a small circle at a steady speed• Keep the camera parallel or at right angles to the horizon and be sure to
pan only in the direction shown by the guides• Try panning at a different speed if the desired results are not achieved• Prop your elbows against your sides• Use a tripod• For best results, use a lens with a focal length of 35 mm or less (50 mm orless in 35 mm format).

O • If the shutter button is pressed all the way down before the panorama
is complete, shooting will end and no panorama may be recorded.
• The last part of the panorama may not be recorded if shooting ends
before the panorama is complete.

• Panoramas are created from multiple frames, and the camera may insome cases be unable to stitch the frames together perfectly.

• Panoramas may be blurred if the subject is poorly lit.
• Shooting may be interrupted if the camera is panned too quickly or• If ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AE, exposure for the entire panorama is determined by the first frame.

N When the auto mode selector lever is set to AUTO, either sensitivity of
AUTO1, AUTO2, or AUTO3 can be set if ISO sensitivity is assigned to
the front command dial function (P 98).

117

5
Taking Photographs

too slowly. Panning the camera in a direction other than that shown
cancels shooting.
• The camera may in some cases record a greater or lesser angle thanselected.
• The desired results may not be achieved with:- Moving subjects- Subjects close to the camera- Unvarying subjects such as the sky or a field of grass- Subjects that are in constant motion, such as waves and waterfalls- Subjects that undergo marked changes in brightness

Panoramas

Viewing Panoramas
With the panorama displayed full frame, press the focus stick (focus lever)down to start panorama playback. Vertical panoramas will scroll vertically,horizontal panoramas horizontally.

PLAY
STOP

PAUSE

• In full-frame playback, you can use the rear command dial to zoom panoramas in or out.

• Panorama playback is controlled using the focus stick.
5
Taking Photographs

Focus stick(focus lever)Up
Down

Full-frame
playback—
Start playback

Left/rightView other pictures

118

Panorama
Panorama
playback
playback paused
End playback
Pause playback
Resume playback
Choose pan
Scroll panorama
direction
manuallyAdvanced Filters
Take photos with filter effects.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and selectAdv. > ADVANCED FILTER.

2 Choose a filter.
3 Take photographs.

N When the auto mode selector lever is set to AUTO, either sensitivityof AUTO1, AUTO2, or AUTO3 can be set on the front command dial
(P 98).

5
Taking Photographs

119Advanced Filters

Advanced Filter Options
Choose from the following filters:
Filter
G TOY CAMERAH MINIATURE
I POP COLORJ HIGH-KEY
Z LOW-KEYK DYNAMIC TONEX SOFT FOCUS

5

Description
Choose for a retro toy camera eﬀect.
The tops and bottoms of pictures are blurred for adiorama eﬀect.
Create high-contrast images with saturated colors.
Create bright, low-contrast images.
Create uniformly dark tones with few areas of emphasized highlights.
Dynamic tone expression is used for a fantasy eﬀect.
Create a look that is evenly soft throughout thewhole image.

Taking Photographsu PARTIAL COLOR (RED)v PARTIAL COLOR (ORANGE)
Areas of the image that are the selected color are
w PARTIAL COLOR (YELLOW)
recorded in that color. All other areas of the image
x PARTIAL COLOR (GREEN)
are recorded in black-and-white.
y PARTIAL COLOR (BLUE)z PARTIAL COLOR (PURPLE)

N Depending on the subject and camera settings, images may in somecases be grainy or vary in brightness or hue.

120

Flash Photography
Use the built-in flash for additional lighting when shooting
at night or indoors under low light.

1 Slide the N lever as shown to raise
the flash.

2 Select FLASH FUNCTION SETTINGFLASH SETTINGFLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVALTTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTINGCOMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING

5

EXIT

O Sync terminal options will be displayed if the built-in flash is lowered and either no flash unit, or an incompatible flash unit, ismounted on the hot shoe (P 359). Raise the flash before adjusting settings.

121

Taking Photographs

in the F FLASH SETTING menu. The
camera will display options for thebuilt-in flash.

3 Highlight items using the focus stick

MODE
Built-In Flash(focus lever) and rotate the rear command dial to change the highlighted
setting (P 121).
ADJUST

END

4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into effect.
O • Depending on the distance to the subject, some lenses may castshadows in photos taken with the flash.

• Be careful not to injure yourself on the edges of the raised flash.
• The flash will not fire at some settings, for example in panorama
mode or when the electronic shutter is used.

• Choose shutter speeds slower than 1⁄180 s when using the flash in exposure mode S (shutter-priority AE) or manual (M).

5N • In TTL mode, the flash may fire several times with each shot. Do not
move the camera until shooting is complete.
• The flash will not fire if OFF is selected for SOUND & FLASH in the
D USER SETTING menu.

Taking Photographs

122

Flash Photography

Flash Settings
The following settings are available with the built-in flash.
MODE
Built-In FlashADJUST

END

Setting123

5
Taking Photographs

Description
Choose from the following options:• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust ﬂash compensation (B) andchoose a ﬂash mode (C).
• M: The ﬂash ﬁres at the selected output (B) regardless ofsubject brightness or camera settings. Output is expressedin fractions of full power, from ⁄ to ⁄. The desired results
A Flash control mode may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limitsof the ﬂash control system; take a test shot and check theresults.
• C (primary flash): Choose if the ﬂash is being used as a primary ﬂash controlling secondly ﬂash units, for example aspart of a studio ﬂash system.
• D (OFF): The ﬂash does not ﬁre.
B Flash compensation/ Adjust ﬂash level. The options available vary with the ﬂash
control mode (A).
outputFlash Photography

Setting

C Flash mode (TTL)5

D SyncDescription
Choose a ﬂash mode for TTL ﬂash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The ﬂash ﬁres only as required; ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the ﬂash will ﬁre when the photo is taken.
• F (STANDARD): The ﬂash ﬁres with every shot if possible;
ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully charged when the shutter isreleased.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ﬂash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
Choose whether the ﬂash is timed to ﬁre immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended inmost circumstances.

Taking Photographs

Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when FLASH is selected for F FLASHSETTING > RED EYE REMOVAL. Red-eye removal minimizes “red-eye”
caused when light from the flash is reflected from the subject’s retinas.
Flash Sync Speed
The flash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of 1⁄180 s or slower.
Optional Flash Units from Fujifilm
The camera can be used with optional Fujifilm shoe-mounted flash units.
Third-Party Flash Units
Do not use third-party flash units that apply over 300 V to the camera hot
shoe. Set the flash control mode to M when using a flash unit that does notsupport TTL flash control.

124

The Shooting Menus

125

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust image quality settings for still photography.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the photo shooting display andselect the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTINGFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTEXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded.

6
The Shooting Menus

126

OptionO3:2
O 16 : 9
O1:1

Image size
7728 × 5152
7728 × 4344
5152 × 5152

OptionO4:3
O5:4

Image size
6864 × 5152
6432 × 5152

Option
P3:2
P 16 : 9
P1:1

Image size
5472 × 3648
5472 × 3080
3648 × 3648

Option
P4:3
P5:4

Image size
4864 × 3648
4560 × 3648

OptionQ3:2
Q 16 : 9
Q1:1

Image size
3888 × 2592
3888 × 2184
2592 × 2592

OptionQ4:3
Q5:4

Image size
3456 × 2592
3264 × 2592

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

The following options are available in SPORTS FINDER MODE
and when 1.29X CROP is selected in burst mode:
Option
P3:2
P 16 : 9
P1:1

Image size
6000 × 4000
6000 × 3376
4000 × 4000

Option
P4:3
P5:4

Image size
5328 × 4000
4992 × 4000

N IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned off or anothershooting mode is selected.

IMAGE QUALITY
Choose a file format and compression ratio.
OptionFINE

Description
Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images.
Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of
NORMAL
images that can be stored.
FINE + RAW
Record both RAW and ﬁne-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
NORMAL + RAW Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
RAW
Record RAW images only.

Option currently selected for
IMAGE QUALITYFINE
NORMAL
FINE + RAW
NORMAL + RAW
RAW

Option selected by pressing function
button to which RAW is assigned
FINE + RAW
NORMAL + RAW
FINE
NORMAL
FINE

127

The Shooting Menus

The Function Buttons
To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, assign RAW to afunction button (P 339). Press the button once to select the option in
the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column).

6RAW RECORDING
Choose whether to compress RAW images.
OptionUNCOMPRESSED

Description
RAW images are not compressed.
RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm that reduces ﬁle size with no loss of image data.
The images can be viewed in FUJIFILM RAW Converter 1,
Capture One 1, RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by
LOSSLESS COMPRESSED SILKYPIX 2, FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO, or other software that
supports “lossless” RAW compression. Quality is the sameas UNCOMPRESSED, but the resulting ﬁles are anywhere from about 30 to 90 percent of their uncompressedsize.
RAW images are compressed using a “lossy”, non-reversible
algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED,COMPRESSED
but the resulting ﬁles are anywhere from about 25 to 35 percent of their uncompressed size.

6
The Shooting Menus

1 For information on when support will be available, visit:https://www.captureone.com/
2 For information on when support will be available, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-poweredby-silkypix/128

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

SELECT JPEG/HEIF
Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF.
OptionJPEG
HEIF

Description
Pictures are recorded in the widely-supported JPEG format.
Pictures are recorded in HEIF, a format with excellent compression but limited options for viewing and sharing.

O • JPEG is automatically selected in place of HEIF during multiple-exposure photography.
• Selecting HEIF disables CLARITY and sets COLOR SPACE to sRGB.
• HEIF pictures are stored on the memory card as files with the exten-

sion “.HIF”. Before the pictures can be viewed on a computer, the extension must be changed to “.HEIC”. This occurs automatically when
HEIF pictures are uploaded from the camera to a computer via USB.

FILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTING
Film simulations and filters can be set when the film simulation
dial is set to FS1, FS2, FS3, or a ACROS.

ACROS
Set a filter when the film simulation dial is set to a ACROS.

129

The Shooting Menus

FS1, FS2, FS3
Assign the film simulation you want to use to FS1, FS2, and FS3 on
the film simulation dial. Select a ACROS or b MONOCHROME
to select a filter to be used also.

6

FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the effects of different kinds of film, including blackand-white (with or without color filters). Choose a palette according to your subject and creative intent.
Optiona AUTO

Description
The camera will automatically select the best ﬁlm simulation mode according to the scene. This option is available
when the auto mode selector lever is set to AUTO.

c PROVIA/STANDARD Ideal for a wide range of subjects.

6
The Shooting Menus

d Velvia/VIVID

Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature.

e ASTIA/SOFT
i CLASSIC CHROME
c REALA ACE

Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look.

g PRO Neg. Hi

Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast.

h PRO Neg. Std

Neutral tonality, best for editing images. Ideal for portrait
with soft gradations and skin tones.
Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image
depth.
Amber tinted highlights and rich shadow tone for printed
photo look.
Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for ﬁlm lookmovie.
Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suitable for still and movie.

g CLASSIC Neg.
n NOSTALGIC Neg.
X ETERNA/CINEMAN ETERNA BLEACH
BYPASS

130

Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.
Faithful color reproduction with hard tonality suitable forvarious scenes.

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Optiona ACROSb MONOCHROME

f SEPIA

Description
Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness.
Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) ﬁlters,
which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues
complementary to the selected color.
• d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast anddarkens skies.
• c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies
considerably.
• b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait.
Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red(R), and green (G) ﬁlters, which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues complementary to the selected color.
• e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast
and darkens skies.
• d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies considerably.
• f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones
in portrait.
Shoots in sepia tone.

https://fujifilm-x.com/products/film-simulation/

131

The Shooting Menus

N • Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness
settings.
• Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 330).
• For more information, visit:

6

MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm orcool color cast) to the a ACROS andb MONOCHROME monochrome film
simulations. Color can be adjusted on the
WARM–COOL and G (Green)–M (Magenta)
axes.
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a film grain effect.
ROUGHNESS
OptionSTRONG
WEAK
OFF

6Description
Choose for rougher grains.
Choose for smoother grains.
Turn the eﬀect oﬀ.

SIZE

The Shooting Menus

Option
LARGE
SMALL

132

Description
Choose for coarser grains.
Choose for ﬁner grains.

MONOCHROMATIC COLOR

SETIMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

COLOR CHROME EFFECT
Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that
tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
OptionSTRONG
WEAK
OFF

Description
Choose for a strong eﬀect.
Choose for a weak eﬀect.
Turn the eﬀect oﬀ.

COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
OptionSTRONG
WEAK
OFF

Description
Choose for a strong eﬀect.
Choose for a weak eﬀect.
Turn the eﬀect oﬀ.

SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
Smooth complexions.

6
Description

The Shooting Menus

OptionSTRONG
WEAK
OFF

Choose for a strong eﬀect.
Choose for a weak eﬀect.
Turn the eﬀect oﬀ.

133

WHITE BALANCE
For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches
the light source.

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionWA WHITE
PRIORITYAUTO
AA AMBIENCEPRIORITYk CUSTOM 1
l CUSTOM 2
m CUSTOM 3
k COLORTEMPERATURE
i DAYLIGHT
j SHADEk FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-1
l FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-2
m FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-3n INCANDESCENT

Description
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiterwhites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
White balance is adjusted automatically.
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
Measure a value for white balance.
Choose a color temperature.
For subjects in direct sunlight.
For subjects in the shade.
Use under “daylight” ﬂuorescent lights.
Use under “warm white” ﬂuorescent lights.
Use under “cool white” ﬂuorescent lights.

Use under incandescent lighting.
Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwaterg UNDERWATER
lighting.

134

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

N • In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired results—for

example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait
subjects—use custom white balance or choose a white balance option suited to the light source.
• White balance is adjusted for flash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITEPRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g UNDERWATER
modes. Turn the flash off using other white balance options.
• White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 330).

Fine-Tuning White Balance
Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a whitebalance option displays a fine-tuning
dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) tofine-tune white balance.

WB SHIFTSETN • To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after selecting a white balance option.
• You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when fine-tuning white balance.

6
The Shooting Menus

135

6

Custom White Balance
Choose k, l, or m to adjust white
CUSTOM 1
balance for unusual lighting conditions
using a white object as a reference (colored objects can also be used to lend
photos a color cast). A white balance tarSHUTTER : NEW WBSHIFTNOT CHANGE
get will be displayed; position and size
the target so that it is filled by the reference object and press the
shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (toselect the most recent custom value and exit without measuring
white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the mostrecent value and display the fine-tuning dialog).
• If “COMPLETED !” is displayed, press MENU/OKCOMPLETED !
to set white balance to the measured
value.
• If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposurecompensation and try again.
SET
CANCEL• If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure compensation and try again.

The Shooting Menus

k: Color Temperature
Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the lightsource.

N Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures “warmer” or “cold-er” or deliberately produce colors that differ radically from those in real
life.

136

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

1 Select k in the white balance menu.

The option currently selected for color temperature will be displayed.

WHITE BALANCECOLOR TEMPERATURE
R:0 B:0

SET

2 Edit the color temperature using theSHIFT

COLOR TEMPERATURE

focus stick (focus lever) and press
MENU/OK.
A fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.

SET

SHIFT

N • You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10 K byrotating the rear command dial.
• Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000 K.
• To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after
choosing a color temperature.

3 Highlight a fine-tuning amount using the focus stick.
4 Press MENU/OK.

6

Color Temperature
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of
direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature
have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature aretinged with blue.

137

The Shooting Menus

The changes will be applied. The selected color temperature will appear
in the display.

DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of detail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or
backlit scenes.
OptionDescription
V 100% Choose for increased contrast.
AUTO
W 200%
Reduce loss of detail in highlights.
X 400%O Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value
according to the scene.

N • If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either

V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting conditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.

6
The Shooting Menus

138

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-contrast scenes.
OptionAUTO
STRONG
WEAK
OFF

Description
Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions.
Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast
scenes.
Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately
high-contrast scenes.
Contrast reduction off.

N • WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.
• When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and
DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically; if you wish to adjust these settings manually, choose OFF.
6
The Shooting Menus

139

TONE CURVE
With reference to a tone curve, adjust theappearance of highlights or shadows,
making them harsher or softer. Choose
higher values to make shadows andhighlights harsher, lower values to makethem softer.
OptionHIGHLIGHTSSHADOWS

TONE CURVEHIGHLIGHTSSHADOWSSET

CANCEL

Description-2 to +4
-2 to +4

COLOR
Adjust color density.
−4

6

−3

−2

−1

The Shooting Menus

Options
0

+1

+2

+3

+4

Options
0

+1

+2

+3

+4

SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
−4

140

−3

−2

−1

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

HIGH ISO NR
Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose higher values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values toleave outlines visible.
−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0

+1

+2

+3

+4

CLARITY
Increase definition while altering tones in highlights and shadows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased definition, lower values for a softer effect.
−5

−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

O The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases
the time need to save each shot.

N Clarity is adjusted automatically when the auto mode selector lever isin the AUTO position.

6
The Shooting Menus

141

LONG EXPOSURE NR
Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures.
Options
ON

OFF

O The additional processing required when ON is selected increases savetimes.

LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
Select ON to improve definition by adjusting for diffraction andthe slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
Options
ON

OFF

COLOR SPACE
Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionsRGB
Adobe RGB

142

Description
Recommended in most situations.
For commercial printing.

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

PIXEL MAPPING
Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures or movies.

1 Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGEQUALITY SETTING tab.

2 Highlight PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pixel mapping.

O • Results are not guaranteed.
• Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping.
• Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is elevated.

• Processing may take several tens of seconds.
x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
Recall settings saved to custom settings banks 1 through7 (CUSTOM 1 through CUSTOM 7) using x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING.
Banks
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 5

CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 6

CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 7

N If you would prefer not to recall saved settings, select NOTHING
SELECTED.

143

The Shooting Menus

NOTHING SELECTEDCUSTOM 4

6

x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Adjust settings as desired and save them to a custom settingsbank. Saved settings can be recalled using H IMAGE QUALITYSETTING > x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING.
Saving Custom Settings
Create a new custom settings bank.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

2 Highlight a destination bank forthe new settings (CREATE NEW C1
through C7) and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

3 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
6

Current camera settings will be saved
to the selected bank.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 1
CREATE NEW OK?

The Shooting Menus

OK
CANCEL

Editing Custom Settings
Edit existing custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIESETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING.

144

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.

3 Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press
MENU/OK.

4 The camera will display a list of shoot-ing menu items; highlight an item you
wish to edit and press MENU/OK.
Adjust the selected item as desired.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

CUSTOM 1
EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGES
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAMECUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECKIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTINGVFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECT
Q

SAVE

EXIT

5 Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting
menu list.
Adjust additional items as desired.

6

UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the photo menu or for B MOVIESETTING > FAUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the movie menu, red dots will appear next to the edited items but thechanges will not be saved automatically.

• To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in thelist and press Q.

• To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE THE

CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous settings,
select RESET THE CHANGES.
• If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied withthe changes intact.

145

The Shooting Menus

N If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > AUTO

Copying Custom Settings
Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting thesettings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been renamed, the name will also be copied to the destination bank.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIESETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING.

2 Highlight the source bank and press
MENU/OK.

3 Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

CUSTOM 1

EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGES
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

6The Shooting Menus

4 Highlight the destination bank (C1through C7) and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

COPY TOCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

N Any changes to custom settings in the destination bank will beoverwritten.

146

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

5 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

The selected settings will be copied
to the destination bank, overwriting
any existing settings.

COPY
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
COPY OK?

OKCANCEL

Deleting Custom Settings
Delete settings from selected custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIESETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.

A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

Any custom settings saved to the selected bank will be deleted.

CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

6
The Shooting Menus

3 Highlight ERASE and press MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1

EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGES
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAMEERASECUSTOM 1
ERASE OK?

OKCANCEL

147

Renaming Custom Settings Banks
Rename selected custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIESETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.

3 Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME andpress MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

CUSTOM 1

EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGES
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

6The Shooting Menus

4 Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and selectSET.
The selected bank will be renamed.

148

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply automatically.
OptionENABLEDISABLE

Description
Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through
CUSTOM 7 apply automatically.
Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom
settings must be applied manually (P 144).

xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter. The
camera can store settings for multiple lenses (LENS 1 through
LENS 6).

N • DISTORTION CORRECTION, COLOR SHADING CORRECTION, andPERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION are available with lenses connected via an M mount adapter.
• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode
(P 210).

LENS 5
INPUT FOCAL LENGTHSETCANCEL149

The Shooting Menus

FOCAL LENGTH SETTINGEnter the lens’s true focal length.

6

DISTORTION CORRECTION
Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or
WEAK options to correct BARREL or
PINCUSHION distortion.

LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION

BARREL STRONGBARREL MEDIUMBARREL WEAKOFF
PINCUSHION WEAKPINCUSHION MEDIUMPINCUSHION STRONGCOLOR SHADING CORRECTION
Color (shading) variations between thecenter and edges of the frame can be adjusted separately for each corner.
To use color shading correction, follow thesteps below.

NEXT

SET

1 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The selected corner is indicated by a triangle.

2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to adjust shading until there is
6
The Shooting Menus

no visible difference in color between the selected corner andthe center of the image.
• Press the focus stick left or right to adjust colors on thecyan–red axis.
• Press the focus stick up or down to adjust colors on theblue–yellow axis.

N To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction
while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.

150

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
Choose from values between –5 and+5. Choosing positive values increases
peripheral illumination, while choosing
negative values reduces peripheral illumination. Positive values are recomSETCANCELmended for vintage lenses, negative values to create the effect of images taken with an antique lens or apinhole camera.

N To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination correction while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.

EDIT LENS NAME
Change the lens name.

6
The Shooting Menus

151

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust focus settings for still photography.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and selectthe G (AF/MF SETTING) tab.

AF/MF SETTING

FOCUS AREA
AF MODE
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING
AF MODE ALL SETTING
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGSSTORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
AF POINT DISPLAYxF WRAP FOCUS POINTEXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 88).
AF MODE
Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C (P 86).

6
The Shooting Menus

ZONE CUSTOM SETTING
Create custom focus zones for use when ZONE is selected for AF
MODE.
ZONE CUSTOM 1

OptionZONE CUSTOM 2

ZONE CUSTOM 3

AF MODE ALL SETTING
Choose the focus area to be selected when AF MODE is ALL.
You can match the shooting style and set only the focus area tobe used. This can be set individually for when the focus mode is
S (AF-S) or C (AF-C).
Option
AF-S

152

AF-C

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
Select focus-tracking options for focus
mode C. Choose from Sets 1–5 according
to your subject or select Set 6 for custom
focus-tracking options.

AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGSSET 1 MULTI PURPOSE

TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITYZONE AREA SWITCHING

AUTO
OK

Option

153

6
The Shooting Menus

Description
A standard tracking option that works well withSET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
the typical range of moving subjects.
The focus system attempts to track the chosen
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES & subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to
CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely
to enter the focus area with the subject.
The focus system attempts to compensate for
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/
subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for
DECELERATING SUBJECT
subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
The focus system attempts to focus quickly on
SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING subjects entering the focus area. Choose for subSUBJECT
jects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switching subjects.
Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING
to sudden changes in velocity but also to large& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT
movements front to back and left to right.
Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED
TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA
SET 6 CUSTOM
SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on
the values for Sets 1–5 (P 154, 156).

Focus Tracking Options
The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set aredescribed below.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how long thecamera waits to switch focus when an
object enters the focus area behind or in
front of the current subject. The higher
the value, the longer the camera will wait.

TRACKING SENSITIVITY

QUICK

LOCKED ON

SETS THE TRACKINGSENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT
ADJUST

0

1

Options
2

3

SWITCH4

O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.

6
The Shooting Menus

SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how sensitive the tracking system is to changes insubject velocity. The higher the value,
the greater the precision with which thesystem attempts to respond to sudden
movement.
0

Options
1

SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY

STEADYACCEL./DECEL.

SETS THE SPEED TRACKINGSENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT
ADJUST

SWITCH2

O The higher the value, the more difficulty the camera will have focusing

in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when
the subject is highly reflective or low in contrast.

154

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

ZONE AREA SWITCHING
This parameter determines the focus
area given priority in zone AF.

ZONE AREA SWITCHING

CENTER AUTOFRONTSETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY
OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA
ADJUST

OptionFRONTAUTO
CENTERSWITCH

Description
Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera.
The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone
and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.

O This option takes effect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode.
Set Values
Parameter values for the different sets are listed below.
SPEED TRACKINGSENSITIVITY
0
0
2
1
2

ZONE AREA
SWITCHING
AUTO
CENTER
AUTO
FRONT
AUTO

155

6
The Shooting Menus

SET 1
SET 2
SET 3
SET 4
SET 5

TRACKINGSENSITIVITY
2
3
2
0
3

Custom Focus Tracking Options
Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6.

1 Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS >AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGSSET 6 CUSTOMSET 6 CUSTOM.

TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITYZONE AREA SWITCHING
ADJUSTAUTO

SET DETAIL

RESET

2 Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate
the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their
original values, press b.

3 Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.

6
The Shooting Menus

156

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in portrait orientation is stored separately from that used when thecamera is in landscape orientation.
OptionDescription
OFF
The same settings are used in both orientations.
FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately.
ON
The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately.

AF POINT DISPLAY yz
Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when
ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >AF MODE.
Options
ON

OFF

6
The Shooting Menus

157

xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
Choose whether focus-area selection is bounded by the bordersof the display or “wraps around” from one edge of the display toanother.
OptionENABLEDISABLE

Description
Focus-area selection “wraps around” from one edge of thedisplay to another.
Focus-area selection is bounded by the borders of the display.

NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point selection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected
for AF MODE.
Option6

Description
Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point
117 POINTS (9 × 13)
grid.
Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point
425 POINTS (17 × 25)
grid.

The Shooting Menus

158

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

PRE-AF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus evenwhen the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera
adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the
shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps
prevent missed shots.
Options
ON

OFF

O Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery.
AF ILLUMINATOR
If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist
autofocus.
OptionsONOFF

subject.

• Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’s
eyes.

159

6
The Shooting Menus

O • The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminatorin some cases.
• If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to theg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
If the camera detects human faces, it willassign them priority over the backgroundand adjust settings appropriately for portraits when setting focus and exposure.
You can also choose whether the camera
focuses on the left or right eye when facedetection is on.
Option6
The Shooting Menus

Description
Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust
eye detection settings.
• g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only.
• u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye
to focus on when a face is detected.
FACE DETECTION
w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential•ON
ly on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
• v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferentially on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
OFFIntelligent Face Detection and eye priority oﬀ.

O • If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may

not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture
is taken.
• In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as awhole rather than the portrait subject.
• Enabling Intelligent Face Detection via FACE DETECTION ON automatically selects OFF for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.

160

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

N • If Y AUTO selected for AUTO MODE SETTING, the camera will au-

161

6
The Shooting Menus

tomatically select the face (of if eye detection is enabled, the eye)when the auto mode selector lever is in the AUTO position.
• A single face detected in or near the focus area will be marked witha white frame.
• If multiple faces are detected in the focus area, the camera will selectone automatically.
• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to reposition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is chosen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING >TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)or (during viewfinder photography) touch controls (P 28).
• When the camera is focused on an eye, you can switch from oneeye to the other using a function button to which RIGHT/LEFT EYE
SWITCH has been assigned.
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no face is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting.
• Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal orientation.
• If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they arehidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus
on faces.
• Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts(P 330).

SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected
type, such as animals or vehicles, when setting focus.
Option6

Description
Select one of the subject types listed below to enable subject
detection.
• E ANIMAL: The camera detects and tracks focus on dogs andcats.
• F BIRD: Camera detects and tracks focus on birds and insects.
G AUTOMOBILE: The camera detects and tracks focus on•
SUBJECTthe body or front ends of cars, primarily those of types used
DETECTION ON
for motor sports.
• H MOTORCYCLE&BIKE: The camera detects and tracks
focus on the riders of motorcycles and bicycles.
• I AIRPLANE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the
cockpits, noses, or bodies of airplanes and drones.
• J TRAIN: The camera detects and tracks focus on the drivercompartments or front ends of trains.
OFF
Subject detection oﬀ.

The Shooting Menus

O Enabling subject detection via SUBJECT DETECTION ON automatically selects OFF for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING.

162

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

N • If Y AUTO selected for AUTO MODE SETTING, the camera will au-

163

6
The Shooting Menus

tomatically select the subject when the auto mode selector lever isin the AUTO position.
• A single subject of the chosen type detected in or near the focus area
will be marked with a white frame.
• If multiple subjects are detected in the focus area, the camera will
select one automatically.
• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to reposition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is chosen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING >TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)or (during viewfinder photography) touch controls (P 28).
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no subject of the chosen type is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, subject detection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting.
• Subjects can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal
orientation.
• Subject detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts(P 330).

AF+MF
If ON is selected and focus has been locked (whether by pressing
the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can beended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring.
Options
ON

OFF

O • Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus

mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables thefocus distance indicator.
• If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus
ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set toinfinity or the minimum focus distance.

N • The previously-selected focus mode will be restored if no operations
are performed for a set period after the focus ring is rotated.
• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE and DIGITAL MICROPRISM focus assist options selected via MF ASSIST cannot be used.

6
The Shooting Menus

AF + MF Focus Zoom
Selecting ON for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK when SINGLE
POINT is chosen for AF MODE lets you zoom in on the current focus areaby rotating the focus ring. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rearcommand dial.

164

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 95).
OptionDescription
Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR)DIGITAL SPLIT split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the
IMAGE
split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts ofthe split image are correctly aligned.
A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject
DIGITALis out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when
MICROPRISM
the subject is in focus.
FOCUS PEAK The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and
HIGHLIGHT peaking level.
OFF
Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used).

N You can also choose MF assist options by holding the center of the rearcommand dial.

6
The Shooting Menus

165

INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING
If ON is selected, the display configured by MF ASSIST appears
only when the focus ring was turned during manual focus mode.
Options
ON

OFF

N MF ASSIST ends if no operations are performed for a set period after
the focus ring is rotated.

FOCUS CHECK
If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on theselected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode.
Options
ON

OFF

N • Pressing the center of the rear command dial cancels focus zoom.
• The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes
when the focus area is changed.

6
The Shooting Menus

166

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA
Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or
MULTI metering is selected.
OptionsON

OFF

xF INSTANT AF SETTING
Choose whether the camera focuses using single AF (AF-S) or
continuous AF (AF-C) when a button to which focus lock or
AF-ON is assigned is pressed in manual focus mode.
OptionAF-S
AF-C

Description
The camera focuses when the button is pressed.
The camera focuses while the button is pressed.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 215).
6
The Shooting Menus

167

xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
Choose the basis for the depth-of-field scale.
OptionDescription
Provides a precision reference for use when assessing depth of ﬁeld
PIXEL BASIS for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computersor other electronic displays.
Provides a practical reference for use when assessing depth of ﬁeld
FILM FORMAT
for pictures that will be viewed at lower resolutions, for example
BASIS
as prints.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 215).
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
Choose how the camera behaves when the shutter button
is pressed all the way down. Settings for AF-S and AF-C focus
modes can be selected separately.
Option6

RELEASEThe Shooting Menus

FOCUS

Description
Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken
when the camera is not in focus.
Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only
taken when the camera is in focus.

O Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when thecamera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF.

168

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

xF AF RANGE LIMITER
Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus
speed.
OptionOFF

CUSTOMPRESET1
PRESET2

Description
Focus limiter disabled.
Limit focus to a range of distances deﬁned by a minimum andmaximum.
• OK: Limit focus to the selected range.
• SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance between them.
Limit focus to a preset range.

O • Choosing a focus range that includes distances shorter than the minimum focus distance of the lens disables the focus limiter.
• The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may differ fromthe actual focus distance.

• Focus range can be set independently on lenses equipped with focus range selectors. Be sure that the option selected in the camera
menus overlaps with that chosen with the lens.

range.

- Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum
focus distance to infinity by rotating the focus ring.

• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 215).

169

The Shooting Menus

N • The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM
is selected:- You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus

6

TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode

Description

Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
TOUCH
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your ﬁnger
SHOOTING on the display.

• In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap yourAF

AF OFFsubject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AF OFF icon.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.

AREA

Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.

OFF

Touch screen mode oﬀ.

6
The Shooting Menus

N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREENSETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.

170

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs theoperations below.

Mode
TOUCH SHOOTING
AF
AREA
OFF

Operation performed
AF-S/MF: Take a picture
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S/MF: OFF

Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.

6
The Shooting Menus

171

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust shooting options for still photography.
To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and selectthe A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab.

SHOOTING SETTING

AUTO MODE SETTING
SPORTS FINDER MODE
PRE-SHOTSELF-TIMERSAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
SELF-TIMER LAMPAE BKT SETTINGFILM SIMULATION BKTEXITN The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
AUTO MODE SETTING
Choose a scene position when the auto mode selector lever is in
AUTO (P 68).

6

SPORTS FINDER MODE
Take pictures using the crop in the centerof the display. Choose this option for pictures of athletes, birds, and other moving
subjects.

The Shooting Menus

OptionON
OFF

Description
Pictures are taken using a 1.29× crop, reducing the picture angle by anamount equivalent to increasing lens focal length by 1.29×; the cropis shown by a frame in the display.
The 1.29× crop is disabled.

N • The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE item in the shooting menu is fixed at P.
• The sports finder is not available in modes that offer an electronic
shutter.

172

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

PRE-SHOT sJ
To reduce the lag between your pressing the shutter button all theway down and the resulting picture being recorded to the memory
card, the camera starts shooting with the electronic shutter when the
shutter button is pressed halfway and saves a series shots starting
just before the shutter button is pressed the rest of the way down.
Options
ON

OFF

N • Pre-shot photography is available only when s ELECTRONICSHUTTER is selected in CH (high speed burst) drive mode (P 176).
• Flash photography is disabled.

6
The Shooting Menus

173

SELF-TIMER
Choose a shutter release delay.
OptionDescription
The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button ispressed. Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when
R 2 SEC
the shutter button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer
counts down.
The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
S 10 SEC Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The
self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken.
OFF
Self-timer oﬀ.

If an option other than OFF is selected, thetimer will start when the shutter button ispressed all the way down. The display shows
the number of seconds remaining until the
shutter is released. To stop the timer before
the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK.

69The Shooting Menus

O • Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing infront of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure.
• The self-timer turns off automatically when the camera is turned off.
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
If ON is selected, the setting chosen for SELF-TIMER will remainin effect after the camera is turned off.
Options
ON

174

OFF

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

SELF-TIMER LAMP
If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer
photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in othersituations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit.
OptionsON

OFF

AE BKT SETTING
Adjust exposure bracketing settings.
Option175

6
The Shooting Menus

Description
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequenceand the amount exposure is varied with each shot.
FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing
FRAMES/STEP SETTING •sequence.
• STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with eachshot.
• 1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken
one at a time.
1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS• CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence aretaken in a single burst.
SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken.

FILM SIMULATION BKTChoose the three film simulation types used for film simulation
bracketing (P 130).
FOCUS BKT SETTING
Choose from AUTO and MANUAL focus bracketing modes(P 107).
PHOTOMETRY
Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 99).
SHUTTER TYPE
Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mutethe shutter sound.

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionDescriptiont MECHANICAL SHUTTER Take pictures with the mechanical shutter.
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER Take pictures with the electronic shutter.
t E-FRONT CURTAIN
Take pictures with the electronic front curtain shutter.
SHUTTERThe camera chooses the mechanical or electronicu MECHANICAL +shutter according to shooting conditions.
ELECTRONIC
The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic frontv E-FRONT +curtain shutter according to shooting conditions.
MECHANICALThe camera chooses the mechanical, electronic, or
w E-FRONT +electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting
MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC
conditions.

If s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER, u MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC,
or w E-FRONT + MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC is selected, shutter speeds faster than ¼000 s can be chosen by rotating the shutter speed dial to 4000 and then rotating the rear command dial.

176

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

O • When using the electronic shutter, note the following:- Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects.
- Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at highshutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended.

- Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under fluorescent lights
or other flickering or erratic illumination.

- When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 297), respect
your subjects’ image rights and right to privacy.

• When using the electronic front-curtain shutter, note the following:- Faster shutter speeds are more likely to result in uneven exposureand loss of resolution in out-of-focus areas of the frame.

N The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:• Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 125–12800• Long exposure noise reduction has no effect• The flash cannot be used

6
The Shooting Menus

177

INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
Configure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset
interval.

1 Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING

in the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab
and press MENU/OK.

2 Highlight WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER

INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTINGWITH IN-CAMERA TIMER
WITH EXTERNAL TIMER

INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMESINTERVALNUMBER OF TIMES

and press MENU/OK.
Interval-timer settings will be displayed.
END

CANCELN If you are using a remote release with its own timer, select WITH
EXTERNAL TIMER. You will be returned to the shooting display,where you can start interval-timer photography using the remoterelease.

6
The Shooting Menus

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to

START WAITING TIME

choose the interval and number ofshots. Press MENU/OK to proceed.

LATER

ESTIMATED START TIME
START

178

PM
CANCELSHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

4 Use the focus stick to choose thestarting time and then press MENU/OK.
Shooting will start automatically.
CANCELO Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of “bulb”
or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released.

N • Use of a tripod is recommended.
• Be careful not to run out of battery while shooting.
• To view the pictures taken so far, press the a button during inter-

179

6
The Shooting Menus

val-timer photography. To return to the shooting display, press thea button again or wait until the start of the next interval.
• The display turns off between shots and lights a few seconds before
the next shot is taken.
• The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button.
• The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are off during
interval-timer photography.
• To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals thenumber of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photography started, set the number of shots to ∞.

INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer
photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots.
Options
ON

OFF

O • Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-

ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVALTIMER SHOOTING > INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim
dramatically during shooting.
• In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an
AUTO option is selected for ISO.

INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE
If ON is selected, the camera will adjust shutter speed during interval-timer photography to ensure that exposures are not longer than the interval between photographs.
Options

6

ON

OFF

The Shooting Menus

O This option takes effect only when shutter speed is set to A (auto).

180

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

FLICKER REDUCTION
Reduce flicker in pictures and the display when shooting underfluorescent lighting and other similar light sources.
OptionDescription
Flicker reduction is applied to all frames continuous
shooting frame rate reduces.
Flicker measurement is taken prior to the ﬁrst frame only
and the same reduction amount is applied to all subsequent frames that ﬂicker may occur.
Flicker reduction disabled.

ALL FRAMESFIRST FRAMEOFFO • Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures.
• OFF is selected for FLICKER REDUCTION when the electronic shutter is used.

• Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording.
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Select ON to allow shutter speed to be fine-tuned to reduce flicker caused by LED lighting and the like.

6

Options
The Shooting Menus

ON

OFF

N This option takes effect only in modes S and M.

181

IS MODE
Reduce blur caused by camera shake or subject motion.
OptionDescription
L CONTINUOUS Image stabilization on. If + MOTION is selected, the camera+ MOTION
will adjust shutter speed to reduce motion blur when movl CONTINUOUS ing objects are detected.
As above, except that image stabilization is performed only
when the shutter button is pressed halfway (focus mode C
only) or the shutter is released. If + MOTION is selected,
m SHOOTING ONLY the camera will adjust shutter speed to reduce motion blurwhen moving objects are detected.
Image stabilization oﬀ. Choose this option when using aOFF
tripod.
M SHOOTING+ MOTION

N • + MOTION has no effect when sensitivity is set to a fixed value, and

6
The Shooting Menus

may also be unavailable at some other combinations of settings. The
effect may vary with lighting conditions and the speed at which theobject is moving.
• The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with IS MODE.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.

ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light (P 97).

182

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
Zoom in on your subject during shooting using ultra-high-resolution digital zoom.
Option
2.0x
1.4x
OFF

Description
Take pictures using 2× zoom. O- and P-size pictures
are automatically cropped to size Q.
Take pictures using 1.4× zoom. O-size pictures are automatically cropped to size P.
Digital teleconverter oﬀ.

O Image quality may drop when the digital teleconverter is used.
N The digital teleconverter cannot be used when a 1.29× crop is selectedduring burst photography or when ON is selected for SPORTS FINDER
MODE.

N For more information, visit:https://fujifilm-dsc.com/

183

6
The Shooting Menus

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest version of apps. The
smartphone can then be used to:• Control the camera and take pictures remotely• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures• Upload location data to the camera

FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust flash-related settings for still photography.
To display flash settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and selectthe F (FLASH SETTING) tab.

FLASH SETTINGFLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVALTTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTINGCOMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTINGEXIT

FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
Choose a flash control mode, flash mode,or sync mode or adjust the flash level.
The options available vary with the flash.

MODE
Built-In FlashADJUST

END

N For more information on flash settings, see “External Flash Units”(P 357) in “Peripherals and Optional Accessories”.

6
The Shooting Menus

RED EYE REMOVAL
Remove red-eye effects caused by the flash.
OptionFLASH
OFF

Description
Flash red-eye reduction only.
Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal oﬀ.

N Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL flash control mode.

184

FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)

TTL-LOCK MODE
Instead of adjusting flash level with each shot, TTL flash control
can be locked for consistent results across a series of photographs.
OptionDescription
Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most
LOCK WITH LAST FLASH
recent photo.
LOCK WITH METERING The camera emits a series of pre-ﬂashes and locks ﬂash
FLASH
output at the metered value.

N • To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use
the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 339).
• Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in effect.
• Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if nopreviously metered value exists.

LED LIGHT SETTING
Choose whether to use the flash unit’s LED video light (if available) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos.
Role of LED video light in still photography
Catchlight
AF-assist illuminator
AF-assist illuminator and catchlight
None

N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.

185

The Shooting Menus

OptionCATCHLIGHT
AF ASSIST
AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT
OFF

6

FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)

COMMANDER SETTING
Choose groups when using the camera flash unit as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control. This option isavailable when the camera is used with clip-on flash units that
support Fujifilm optical wireless flash control.
Options
Gr A

Gr B

Gr C

OFF

N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.

CH SETTING
Choose the channel used for communication between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used
for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity.
Options

6

CH1

The Shooting Menus

186

CH2

CH3

CH4

MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust options for movies shot during still photographyusing function buttons that have been assigned MOVIERECORDING RELEASE.
To display movie settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and selectthe B (MOVIE SETTING) tab.

MOVIE SETTING

MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTINGF IS MODE
F IS MODE BOOSTAUDIO SETTINGMIC/REMOTE RELEASE
FREC FRAME INDICATOREXITN The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
MOVIE MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 193). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
HIGH SPEED REC
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 194). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.

F IS MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 202). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F IS MODE BOOSTThis item is also found in the movie menus (P 202). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.

187

The Shooting Menus

MEDIA REC SETTING
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 195). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.

6

AUDIO SETTING
Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording.
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
OptionAUTO
MANUALOFF

Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recordinglevels.
Turn the built-in microphone oﬀ.

EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.
OptionAUTO
MANUAL

6

OFF

Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recordinglevels.
Disable recording using external microphones.

The Shooting Menus

MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected via the microphone/remote release connector.
Option
MIC
LINE

188

Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external microphone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.

MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)

MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON

OFF

WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
Options
ON

OFF

LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-frequency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON

OFF

6
The Shooting Menus

HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option0
1—10

Description
Mute output to the headphones.
Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.

189

XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option6
The Shooting Menus

Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with thehelp of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel (stereo) sound using only a microphone connected
via the XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound withthe help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones orother audio monitors during movie recording.
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con4ch AUDIO MONITORING •nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in microphone.
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI
HDMI 4ch AUDIO OUTPUT
connector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone
is output to the HDMI connector.

N • If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone

jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected formovie file format.

190

MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)

MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 221). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 204). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.

6
The Shooting Menus

191

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust movie-recording options.
To display options for movie recording,press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the B (MOVIE SETTING)tab.

MOVIE SETTING

MOVIE SETTING LIST
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
FSELF-TIMERMEDIA REC SETTINGHDMI OUTPUT SETTINGFIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
EXIT

MOVIE SETTING LIST
View current movie recording settings.

N These options can also be viewed by pressing the DISP/BACK button while
the movie quick menu is displayed.

6
The Shooting Menus

192

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

MOVIE MODE
Before shooting movies, choose theframe rate and the frame size and aspectratio.

MOVIE MODE

END

CANCEL1 In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then highlight MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight the

3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight aframe rate (B) and press MENU/OK.
23.98P

24P

25P

Options
29.97P

50P

59.94P

N The choice of frame rates varies with the movie mode.

193

6
The Shooting Menus

desired frame size and aspect ratio (A) and press the stickright.
• Choose J16 : 9 for 6.2 K movies with an aspect ratio of
16 : 9.
• Choose T16:9 or W17:9 for high-quality 4 K movies
with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
• Choose V16 : 9 or 117 : 9 for 4K movies with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
• Choose W16 : 9 or W17 : 9 for Full HD movies with aspectratios of 16 or 17 to 9.

HIGH SPEED REC
Record high-frame-rate movies. High-frame-rate movies can beplayed back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving
subjects or details too fleeting for the naked eye. Select ON tochoose the recording and playback rates separately.

N Choose ON HDMI ONLY to record footage only to external recorders

connected via HDMI. Note that this option does not support playback
frame-rate selection.

Frame Size
Options
W16 : 9W17 : 9Recording
Options
100P

6

120P

200P

240P

Playback

The Shooting Menus

23.98P

24P

25P

Options
29.97P

50P

59.94PN • High-speed movies are recorded with no sound.
• The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with thegoal of maintaining the selected bit rate.

• The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected
for rate of recording.

194

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

F SELF-TIMER
Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the start of recording.
• The display shows the number of seconds remaining before recording begins.
• To stop the timer before recording begins, press DISP/BACK.
Options
3 SEC

5 SEC

10 SECOFF

MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, compression, and bit rate.
Destination
Choose save options and save and output destinations for movies.
Description
Movies are saved solely to the memory card.
Movies are recorded only to devices connected via HDMI.

195

The Shooting Menus

OptionZ
U

6

File Type and Compression
Choose the movie file type and compression.
Option6
The Shooting Menus

Description
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is recorded
H.264 ALL-I 420
at a depth of 8 bits using All-I interframe compression andMOV
4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is recorded
H.264 LongGOP 420
at a depth of 8 bits using Long GOP interframe compression
MOV
and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
H.264 LongGOP 420 A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded to the
MP4
web.
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. FootH.265 ALL-I 420
age is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe
MOV
compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. FootH.265 LongGOP 420
age is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interMOV
frame compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. FootH.265 ALL-I 422
age is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe
MOV
compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. FootH.265 LongGOP 422
age is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interMOV
frame compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling.

N • 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling is used for footage output to external

devices connected via HDMI; H.264 footage is output at a bit depth of
8 bits and footage in other formats at a depth of 10 bits.
• All-I compresses each frame separately. Files are larger, but the factthat the data for each frame are saved separately makes this a good
choice for footage that will be further processed.
• Long GOP balances good image quality with high compression. Filesare smaller, making it a good choice for longer movies.
• The options available for file type and compression vary with the options selected for MOVIE MODE, HIGH SPEED REC, and F-Log/HLG
RECORDING.

196

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

Bit Rate
Choose the movie bit rate.
Options
50Mbps100Mbps

200Mbps360Mbps

N The options available for bit rate vary with the settings chosen for high-speed movie recording and compression. The actual bit rate may beslower than the selected value depending on the subject.

6
The Shooting Menus

197

HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is output to an
HDMI device.
HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY
If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected
will mirror the information in the camera display.
Options
ON

OFF

HDMI REC CONTROL
Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals
to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to startand stop movie recording.
Options
ON

6

OFF

The Shooting Menus

RAW OUTPUT SETTING
Choose whether to output RAW footage to external recorders
connected via HDMI.
OptionDescription
RAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to ATOMOS video recorders.
SETTING ATOMOSRAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to Blackmagic Design video recorders.
SETTING BlackmagicOFF
Do not output RAW footage to external recorders.

198

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)N • Movie frame size automatically changes to 6.2K.
• RAW footage output to external devices is not saved to the memory
cards inserted in the camera.

• In-camera image enhancements are not applied to the RAW output.
• ISO sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 800 and ISO 12800.
• Footage output to external devices is generated from the original
RAW data and its quality, which varies with device specifications, may
not be equal to that achieved as the end result of post-productionor the like.
• Focus zoom is not available when RAW is selected for HDMI output.
• RAW footage output via HDMI to incompatible devices will not display correctly but will instead will display as a mosaic.
• RAW output is disabled in some movie and high-speed recording
modes.

FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
Fix the movie crop ratio at 1.25∶1. This makes it easier to match
crops after changing movie settings.
Options
ON

6

OFF

The Shooting Menus

199

F-Log/HLG RECORDING
Choose the destination for F‐Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma)movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device.
Optiontuvw

Description
The footage is processed using ﬁlm simulation and both
saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output tothe HDMI device in F-Log format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output tothe HDMI device in F-Log2 format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output tothe HDMI device in HLG format.

N • F-Log and FLog2 offer gentle gamma curves with wide gamuts suit-

6
The Shooting Menus

able for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted tovalues between ISO 500 and ISO 12800 (F-Log) or between ISO 1000and ISO 12800 (FLog2).
• The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the international ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible
displays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast
scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between
ISO 800 and ISO 12800.
• Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selectedfor H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > F FILM SIMULATION in theshooting menu.

200

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

DATA LEVEL SETTING
Choose a signal range for movie recording.
OptionVIDEO RANGEFULL RANGE

Description
The signal range for 8-bit movies is limited to 16–235 and thatfor 10-bit movies to 64–940.
The signal ranges for 8-bit and 10-bit movies are respectively
0–255 and 0–1023.

F PHOTOMETRY
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 99).
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 181).
Options
ON

OFF

6
The Shooting Menus

201

F IS MODE
Choose the image stabilization mode.
OptionIBIS/OISIBIS/OIS + DIS
OFFDescription
Enable in-body (IBIS) and optical (OIS) image stabilization.
IBIS is used with lenses that do not support OIS.
Enable in-body (IBIS), optical (OIS), and digital (DIS) image
stabilization. The crop is adjusted according to the option
selected for MOVIE MODE. This setting can compensate
for more severe camera shake.
Image stabilization oﬀ ; x appears in the display.

N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.

F IS MODE BOOST
Choose the image stabilization level.
OptionON
OFF

6
The Shooting Menus

Description
Suitable for shots with no panning.
Suitable for shots with panning.

N Assigning IS MODE BOOST to a function button allows the image stabilization level to be changed while recording is in progress (P 339).

202

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

F ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
OptionDescription
Choose for special situations. Note that dynamic range may
be reduced and that pictures may be mottled.
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown indisplay.
The ISO sensitivity (ISO 125 to ISO 12800) for the brightnessof the subject is set automatically.

H (25600)
125–12800
AUTO

ZEBRA SETTING
Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes
in the movie mode display.
OptionZEBRA RIGHT

Right-slanting stripes.

Description

ZEBRA LEFT
OFF

Left-slanting stripes.
Stripes oﬀ.

6

50

55

60

65

70

Options
75
80

85

90

95

100

203

The Shooting Menus

ZEBRA LEVEL
Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display.

MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only thecommand dials and touch-screen controls. You may find thishelpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being recorded with movies (P 30).
OptionsON

OFF

F REC FRAME INDICATOR
If ON is selected, the borders of the display will turn red during
movie recording.
Options
ON

OFF

N The borders are displayed in green during high-speed movie recording.

6
The Shooting Menus

204

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

TALLY LIGHT
Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie
recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.

Indicator lamp

Description
The indicator lamp lights during movie recording.
The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording.
The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording.

6

The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording.
The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain oﬀ during movie recording.

205

The Shooting Menus

OptionFRONT OFFREAR zFRONT OFFREAR yFRONT zREAR zFRONT zREAR OFFFRONT yREAR yFRONT yREAR OFFFRONT OFFREAR OFF

AF-assist illuminator

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 143).
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 144).
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 149).
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONThis item is also found in the photo menus (P 183).

6
The Shooting Menus

206

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust image quality settings for movies.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display andselect the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGFFILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTINGFFILM SIMULATIONFMONOCHROMATIC COLOR
FWHITE BALANCE
FDYNAMIC RANGEFTONE CURVEFCOLORFSHARPNESSEXITN The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 129).
F FILM SIMULATION
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 130).

F WHITE BALANCE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 134).

207

6
The Shooting Menus

F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 132).

F DYNAMIC RANGE
Choose a dynamic range for movie recording.
Option
V100%
W200%
X400%

Description
See “DYNAMIC RANGE” (P 138).

N • AUTO (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during
movie recording.
• W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
X400% at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.

• This item is available when t is selected for B MOVIESETTING > F-Log/HLG RECORDING.

F TONE CURVE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 140).

6The Shooting Menus

F COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 140).

208

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)

F SHARPNESS
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 140).
F HIGH ISO NR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 141).
INTERFRAME NR
Select AUTO to automatically adjust interframe noise reduction
according to shooting conditions.
Options
AUTO

OFF

N “Ghosting” may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting.

6
The Shooting Menus

209

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)

F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION
Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during
movie recording.
OptionsON

OFF

N • If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera
is attached, peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to theoption selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > xF MOUNTADAPTOR SETTING > PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
in the shooting menu (P 151).
• Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this option.

xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 149). Changes to
one apply to the other.

6
The Shooting Menus

210

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust focus settings for movies.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and selectthe G (AF/MF SETTING) tab.

AF/MF SETTINGFFOCUS AREA
FAF MODEFAF-C CUSTOM SETTINGxFWRAP FOCUS POINT
FgFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTINGFSUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
FAF+MFFMF ASSISTEXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 88).

O The focus area cannot be resized while recording is in progress.
F AF MODE
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording.

WIDE/TRACKING
AREA

Description
The camera selects the focus area automatically.
The camera tracks the subject automatically if the focus stick(focus lever) is pushed to the center or the screen is touchedwhen the focus mode is C. The camera selects the focus
subject automatically when the focus mode is S.
The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area.

211

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionMULTI

F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
Select focus-tracking options when recording movies in focus
mode C.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an object enters the focus area behind or in front of the current subject. See “TRACKING SENSITIVITY” (P 154).
0

Options
2

1

3

4

O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.

6

AF SPEED
Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values forfaster response times, lower values for slower response times.

The Shooting Menus

−5

−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 158). Changes to
one apply to the other.

212

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording
movies.
OptionFACE DETECTION ON
OFF

Description
See “g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING” (P 160).
Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority oﬀ.

O When Intelligent Face Detection is enabled, the camera will focus using continuous AF even when single AF (S) is chosen with the focus
mode selector. Intelligent Face Detection is not available in manual
focus mode.

F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 162).

O The camera automatically switches to continuous AF when SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > F SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING, even if the focus mode selector is rotated to S.
Subject detection is not available in manual focus mode.

6
The Shooting Menus

213

F AF+MF
Select ON to enable manual focus in focus modes S and C. Manual
focus can be suspended by pressing the AFON button.
Options
ON

OFF

F MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 95).
OptionDescription
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT
color and peaking level.
A needle indicates whether focus is in front of or behind
FOCUS METER
the subject.
FOCUS METER + PEAK
Focus is indicated by both a meter and peak highlights.
HIGHLIGHT
Indicators for locations in and out of focus are displayed
FOCUS MAP
on the screen.
OFF
Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used).

6
The Shooting Menus

F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 166).

214

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

F FOCUS CHECK
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 166).
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 167). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 168). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 169). Changes to
one apply to the other.

6
The Shooting Menus

215

F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode

AF

AREA

6
The Shooting Menus

OFF

Description
Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point.
Use the shutter button to start and stop recording.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), you can refocus at any time by tapping
your subject in the display.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
• When shooting movies in focus mode M (MF), you can tap thedisplay before recording begins to focus on the selected point
using Instant AF, and tap the display during recording to position the focus point.
Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to startand stop recording.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), you can reposition the focus area at
any time by tapping your subject in the display. To focus, use
the button to which AF-ON is assigned.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to position the focus area over your subject.
Touch screen mode oﬀ.

N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREENSETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.

216

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs theoperations below.

Mode
AF
AREA
OFF

Operation performed
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S/MF: OFF

Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.

6
The Shooting Menus

217

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

FOCUS CHECK LOCK
Choose whether focus zoom remains in effect once movie recording begins.
Options
ON

6
The Shooting Menus

218

OFF

AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust settings for audio recorded during filming.
To display audio settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and selectthe P (AUDIO SETTING) tab.

AUDIO SETTING

INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENTMIC JACK SETTINGMIC LEVEL LIMITER
WIND FILTERLOW CUT FILTERHEADPHONES VOLUME
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
EXIT

INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
OptionAUTO
MANUALOFF

Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recordinglevels.
Turn the built-in microphone oﬀ.

EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.

MANUALOFF

Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recordinglevels.
Disable recording using external microphones.

219

The Shooting Menus

OptionAUTO

6

MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected via the microphone/remote release connector.
OptionMIC
LINE

Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external microphone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.

MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON

6

OFF

WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.

The Shooting Menus

Options
ON

220

OFF

AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)

LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-frequency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON

OFF

HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option0
1—10

Description
Mute output to the headphones.
Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.

MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
Specify whether the device connected to the microphone/remote release connector is a microphone or a remote release.
Optionsm MIC

n REMOTE

6
The Shooting Menus

221

AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)

XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option6
The Shooting Menus

Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with thehelp of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound withthe help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones orother audio monitors during movie recording.
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con•
4ch AUDIO MONITORING
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in microphone.
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
HDMI 4ch AUDIO
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI conOUTPUT
nector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.

N • If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone

jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected formovie file format.

222

TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame number) display settings for movie recording.
To display time code settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display
and select the Q (TIME CODE SETTING)
tab.

TIME CODE SETTINGTIME CODE DISPLAY
START TIME SETTING
COUNT UP SETTINGDROP FRAME
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
TIME CODE SYNC. SETTINGEXIT

TIME CODE DISPLAY
Select ON to display time codes during movie recording andplayback.
Options
ON

OFF

START TIME SETTING
Choose the time code starting time.

6

COUNT UP SETTING
Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during
movie recording.
OptionREC RUN
FREE RUN

Description
Time is clocked only during movie recording.
Time is clocked continuously.

223

The Shooting Menus

OptionDescription
MANUAL INPUT Choose a start time manually.
CURRENT TIME Set the start time to the current time.
RESET
Set the start time to 00:00:00.

DROP FRAME
At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradually develop between the time code (measured in seconds) andthe actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second).
Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to matchthe recording time to the time code.
OptionON
OFF

Description
The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict
match between the time code and the actual recording time.
Frames are not dropped.

N • The time code display varies with the option selected.
ON

OFF

6

• Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop.

The Shooting Menus

HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices.
Options
ON

224

OFF

TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)

TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING
Choose whether to synchronize time codes with an external device.
CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT
If ON is selected, the camera connects with paired external devices and synchronizes time codes. Because simultaneous connection with a smartphone is not possible, the smartphone icon
is displayed in the yellow on the screen.
Options
ON

OFF

PAIRING REGISTRATION
Pair the ATOMOS AirGlu BT and camera.

• If the camera connects with the ATOMOSAirGlu BT, an icon appears on the screen.

6

Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth DEVICE LIST
in the network/USB setting menu.

225

The Shooting Menus• The pairing with the ATOMOS AirGlu BT can be ended using

TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)Time code synchronization state
You can check the time code synchronization
state by the icons displayed on the EVF or LCD.

Icon
(white)(white)(amber)

6
The Shooting Menus

(red)

226

Synchronization state
The time code synchronization function is not
being used.
Time codes are being synchronized.
External devices have been disconnected or timecodes are not being synchronized. If time codes
have been synchronized once, and the cameracontinues to count internally after CONNECT TO
ATOMOS AirGlu BT was set to ON, a value isdisplayed.
Time codes are not being synchronized because
the frame rate settings are diﬀerent. If time codes
have been synchronized once, and the cameracontinues to count internally after CONNECT TO
ATOMOS AirGlu BT was set to ON, a value isdisplayed.

Playback and the Playback
Menu

227

The Playback Display
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during
playback.

O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
A

B

C D

E

F

G

12/31/2024
Playback and the Playback Menu

7

i
h
g
f

H
I

e
d
c
b
a
Z
J
Y
X

228

W

V

U

T

S

R Q P

ON M L K

The Playback Display

Playback and the Playback Menu

A Date and time..................................47, 49, 291 S Sensitivity ..........................................................97
B Frame-number display
T Exposure compensation ............................100
C Image transfer order
U Aperture...............................................73, 79, 81
D Frame.io image transfer order
V Time code.......................................................223
E Image transfer status
W Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 81
F Frame.io upload progress
X Playback mode indicator .............................54
G Frame number..............................................325 Y Movie icon ........................................................64
H Protected image ...........................................242 Z Four-channel (quadrophonic) audio ... 222
I Location data................................................327 a Bluetooth host ..............................................258
J Low battery ......................................................46 b Photobook assist indicator .......................250
K Image quality................................................127 c Bluetooth ON/OFF
L Movie mode ..................................................193 d DPOF print indicator ...................................252
M HEIF ..................................................................129 e Frame.io connection status ......................273
N Image size ......................................................126 f Voice memo ..................................................244
O Film format ....................................................196 g Gift image .........................................................54
P Film simulation ............................................130 h Rating..............................................................245
Q Dynamic range ............................................138 i Face detection indicator ............................160
R White balance ..............................................1347

229

The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the displayof indicators during playback.

Standard
12/31/2024

Information off

1/999

Playback and the Playback Menu

12/31/2024 1/999

NEXT

7

Info display

230

The Playback Display

Viewing Photo Information
The photo information display changes eachtime the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up.

Basic data
12/31/2024

Info display 1
12/31/2024 1/999

1/999

Playback and the Playback Menu

NEXT

12/31/2024

1/1000S.S 1/1000

F 5.6

ISO 12800

5.6

12800

+1.0
BACK

Info display 3

+1.0

NEXT

7

Info display 2

Zooming in on the Focus Point
Press the center of the rear command dial to zoom in on the focus point.
Press again to return to full-frame playback.

231

Viewing Pictures
Read this section for information on playback zoom andmulti-frame playback.
Use the rear command dial to go from full-frame playback to
playback zoom or multi-frame playback. Rotate the rear command dial to right or left, the display changes as shown. The display changes in reverse order when rotate the dial to opposite
direction.
Playback and the Playback Menu

N To cancel playback zoom or multi-frame playback, press DISP/BACK or
MENU/OK.

Maximum zoom

Medium zoom
Playback zoom

7

Full-frame playback
Multi-frame playback

Nine-frame view232

Hundred- frame view

Viewing Pictures

Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current
picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK, MENU/OK,
or the center of the rear command dial.

N The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGEQUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE.

ScrollWhen the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick(focus lever) can be used to view areas of theimage not currently visible in the display.

Multi-Frame Playback
To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear command dial left when a picture is displayed full frame.

N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK
to view the highlighted image full frame.
• In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or
down to view more pictures.

233

Playback and the Playback Menu

Navigation window

7

The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
The playback menu is displayed when
you press MENU/OK in playback mode.

PLAY BACK MENU

RAW CONVERSIONHEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
CROP
RESIZEPROTECT
IMAGE ROTATEVOICE MEMO SETTING
EXIT

Playback and the Playback Menu

RAW CONVERSION
Even if you don’t have a computer, you can use the camera tomodify RAW pictures and save them in other formats.
Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format

1 Display a RAW picture.
2 Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu.
3 Press MENU/OK.
RAW CONVERSION

A list of settings will be displayed.

REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
FILE TYPEIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
PUSH/PULL PROCESSINGDYNAMIC RANGE

7
CREATECANCEL4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight asetting.

5 Press the focus stick right to display
options.

234

RAW CONVERSION
100%
200%
400%

The Playback Menu

6 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option.
7 Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings
list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 toadjust additional settings.

8 Press the Q button.

A preview of the copy will be displayed.

9 Press MENU/OK.

The copy will be saved.

ton when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q but-

7

235

The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures fromRAW to another format are:Setting

Playback and the Playback Menu

7

Description
Create a copy using the settings in eﬀect at the time
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
the photo was taken.
FILE TYPE
Choose a ﬁle format.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose an image size.
IMAGE QUALITY
Adjust image quality.
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING Adjust exposure.
DYNAMIC RANGE
Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast.
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows
D RANGE PRIORITY
for natural-looking results when photographinghigh-contrast scenes.
FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the eﬀects of diﬀerent types of ﬁlm.
Choose a monochrome tint for photographs takMONOCHROMATIC COLOR en using FILM SIMULATION > a ACROS andb MONOCHROME.
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a ﬁlm grain eﬀect.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds,
yellows, and greens.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
blues.
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
Smooth complexions.
WHITE BALANCE
Adjust white balance.
WB SHIFT
Fine-tune white balance.
TONE CURVE
Adjust highlights and shadows.
COLOR
Adjust color density.
SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
HIGH ISO NR
Process the copy to reduce mottling.
CLARITY
Increase deﬁnition.
Improve deﬁnition by adjusting for diﬀraction and
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.

236

The Playback Menu

Setting
COLOR SPACEHDR MODEDIGITAL TELE-CONV.

Description
Choose the color space used for color reproduction.
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows.
Switch to the crop in eﬀect when the photo was taken.

O Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosenwhen the picture was taken.

Playback and the Playback Menu

7

237

HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF.
SELECT IMAGES
Select HEIF pictures for conversion.
FILE FORMAT
Choose a format for the converted pictures.

Playback and the Playback Menu

7

JPEG

Options
TIFF 8bit

TIFF 16bit

ERASE
Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pictures.

O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures orcopy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
OptionFRAME
SELECTED FRAMESALL FRAMES

Description
Delete pictures one at a time.
Delete multiple selected pictures.
Delete all unprotected pictures.

FRAME
1 Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll throughpictures and press MENU/OK to delete.

N • A confirmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; besure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK.
• Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the focus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK todelete.

238

The Playback Menu

SELECTED FRAMES
1 Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.

2 Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select.

• Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R).
• To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again.

3 When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display aconfirmation dialog.

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pic-

N Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S.
ALL FRAMES
1 Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.

2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK andpress MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures.

N • Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted
before the button was pressed cannot be recovered.
• If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a
DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures.

239

Playback and the Playback Menu

tures.

7

CROP
Create a cropped copy of the current picture.

1 Display the desired picture.
2 Select CROP in the playback menu.
3 Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press thefocus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the
picture until the desired portion is displayed.

Playback and the Playback Menu

4 Press MENU/OK to display a confirmation dialog.
5 Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate
file.

N • The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in thecropped copy.
• If the size of the final copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow.
• All copies have an aspect ratio of 3∶2.

7240

The Playback Menu

RESIZE
Create a small copy of the current picture.

1 Display the desired picture.
2 Select RESIZE in the playback menu.
3 Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a confirmation
dialog.

4 Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate
file.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N The sizes available vary with the size of the original image.

7

241

PROTECT
Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of thefollowing options and press MENU/OK.
OptionFRAME
SET ALLRESET ALL

Description
Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete.
Protect all pictures.
Remove protection from all pictures.

Playback and the Playback Menu

O Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.
N • Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smartphones or tablets removes upload marking.
• Protection can also be added or removed by pressing the AFON button during playback.

7

242

The Playback Menu

IMAGE ROTATE
Rotate pictures.

1 Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB.
2 Display the desired picture.
3 Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu.
4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture
90° clockwise, up to rotate it 90° counterclockwise.

the selected orientation whenever it is played back on thecamera.

N • Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before rotating pictures.
• The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with otherdevices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated whenviewed on a computer or on other cameras.
• Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB are automatically displayed in the correct orientation during playback.

Playback and the Playback Menu

5 Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in

7243VOICE MEMO SETTING
Add a voice memo to the current photograph.

1 Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu.
2 Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo.
3 Press and hold the center of the front command dial to re-cord the memo. Recording ends after 30 s or when you release the dial.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos.
• Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures.
• Deleting the picture also deletes the memo.
Playing Voice Memos
Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback.
• To play a memo, select the picture and press the center of the front command dial.
• A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back.
• Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and thenpressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume.
Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.

7

244

The Playback Menu

RATING
Rate pictures using stars.

1 Select RATING in the playback menu.
2 Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and therear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars(“I”).

single-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback.

• Use touch controls to zoom in or out.
• Ratings cannot be applied to:- Protected pictures- Movies- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • The focus stick (focus lever) can be used in place of the front command dial to choose a picture.
• The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AEL button in

7245

TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE
Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth (P 258).

1 Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE &TRANSFER.

N Select RESET ORDER to remove “upload to smartphone” marking
from all pictures before proceeding.

Playback and the Playback Menu

2 Mark pictures for upload.

Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
• To display only pictures that meetselected criteria, press DISP/BACK before marking begins.
• To select all pictures, press the Q button.
• Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.

7

3 Press DISP/BACK and select START

TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be uploaded.

246

SELECT IMAGE
FRAME

SELECT ALL

SELECT RANGE

SELECT

FINISH/SETTINGSELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGFINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFERThe Playback Menu

Filtering Pictures
To display only pictures that meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection
dialog and select FILTERING.

SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGFILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS

O Selecting FILTERING removes any existing upload marking.

and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device willcontinue even while the camera is off.
• When d SELECT & SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, thepicture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button.

247

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.
• The following cannot be selected for upload:- Protected pictures- Movies- RAW images- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)• If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF

7

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest apps. The smartphone
can then be used to:• Control the camera and take pictures remotely• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures• Upload location data to the camera

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • For downloads and other information, visit:https://fujifilm-dsc.com/• If r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected for D BUTTON/

DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to thesmartphone using the Fn1 button.

7248

The Playback Menu

SLIDE SHOW
View pictures in an automated slide show. Press MENU/OK to startand press the focus stick (focus lever) right or left to skip aheador back. Press DISP/BACK at any time during the show to view onscreen help. The show can be ended at any time by pressing
MENU/OK.

N The camera will not turn off automatically while a slide show is in progress.

Playback and the Playback Menu

7249

PHOTOBOOK ASSISTCreate books from your favorite photos.
Creating a Photobook
1 Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU > PHOTOBOOKASSIST.

2 Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus le-ver) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when thebook is complete.

Playback and the Playback Menu

7

N • Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected
for photobooks.
• The first picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the focus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead.

3 Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to se-lect all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The newbook will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu.

N • Books can contain up to 300 pictures.
• Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted.
Viewing Photobooks
Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK
to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to scroll through the pictures.

250

The Playback Menu

Editing and Deleting Photobooks
Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options
will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the onscreen instructions.
• EDIT: Edit the book as described in “Creating a Photobook”.
• ERASE: Delete the book.

Playback and the Playback Menu

7251

PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
Create a digital “print order” for DPOF-compatible printers.

1 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > PRINT ORDER (DPOF).
2 Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pic-tures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or
RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before
proceeding.

3 Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the
Playback and the Playback Menu

7

print order.

4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up

or down to choose the number ofcopies (up to 99).

N To remove a picture from the order,press the focus stick down until thenumber of copies is 0.

PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
DPOF: 00001

01 SHEETS
FRAME

SET

Total numberof prints
Number of copies

N Repeat steps 3–4 to complete the print order.
5 The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press
MENU/OK to exit.

N • The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon
during playback.
• Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single
memory card.

• If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as
described above.

252

The Playback Menu

instax PRINTER PRINT
To print pictures to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE printers, first
select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/
USB settings menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name
(SSID) and password, then follow the steps below.

1 Turn the printer on.
2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax

PRINTER PRINT. The camera will connect to the printer.

PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
CONNECTINGCANCEL

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) todisplay the picture you want to print,then press MENU/OK. The picture will
be sent to the printer and printing
will start.

PRINTER PRINT
100-0020

SET
instax-12345678

CANCELN • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.

253

Playback and the Playback Menu

FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234

7

The Playback Menu

DISP ASPECT
Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on
High Definition (HD) devices (this option is available only when
an HDMI cable is connected).

Options
Playback and the Playback Menu

16 : 93:2

N Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 3 : 2 full screen.
The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms
cropped out.

7254

Network/USB Features andSettings

255

Overview
This chapter outlines features that can among other things
be used to upload pictures to, or control the camera andtake pictures remotely from, a smartphone or computer.
Supported Features
This camera supports the following features:
FeatureConnecting to thesmartphone app
Network/USB Features and Settings

USB card readers
Web camera
instax printers
Upload to Frame.io
RAW processing
Saving and Loading
Settings

8256

Description
P
Connect to smartphones via Bluetooth® and upload
pictures or control the camera remotely while the 258
smartphone displays the view through the lens.
Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone262
via USB and copy pictures from memory cards.
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use
267
as a webcam.
Print pictures on connected instax printers.
268
Upload ﬁles to Frame.io.
270
Harness the power of the camera’s image
processing engine when processing RAW pictures 277
on a computer.
Save camera settings to, or load existing from, a278
computer.

Overview

Camera indicator lamp display
The camera indicator lamp shows thestatus of its connection to Frame.io andthe like.

Indicator lamp
Blinks red
Glows red
Blinks orange

Blinks green
Blinks green and red

The EVF/LCD Displays
The status of the connection to Frame.io andthe like is also shown by an icon in the electronic viewfinder or LCD monitor.

Network/USB Features and Settings

Blinks orange and red

Connection status
No network connection.
No network connection; pictures awaiting upload.
Connected to network but not to Frame.io.
Connected to network but not to Frame.io; pictures
awaiting upload.
Ready for upload to Frame.io.
Ready for upload to Frame.io; pictures awaiting
upload.

8
Icon

Connection status
No network connection.
Connected to network but not to Frame.io.
Ready for upload to Frame.io.

257

Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)Connect the camera with a smartphone via Bluetooth® tocopy pictures to the smartphone or control the camera remotely while previewing the view through the lens in thesmartphone display.

N The camera automatically switches to a wireless LAN connection when
copying pictures to the smartphone.

Network/USB Features and Settings

Installing Smartphone Apps
Before establishing a connection between the smartphone andcamera, you will need to install at least one dedicated smartphone app. Visit the following website and install the desiredapps on your phone.
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/

N The apps available vary with the smartphone operating system.
Connecting to a Smartphone
Pair the camera with the smartphone and connect via Bluetooth®.

8

1 Press the x(Bluetooth) button when
the camera is in shooting mode.

N You can also proceed directly to Step 3 by holding the DISP/BACK
button during playback.

258

Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)2 Highlight Bluetooth and press MENU/OK.

Bluetooth & FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING

BluetoothBluetooth3 Highlight PAIRING and press MENU/OK.

Bluetooth

PAIRING
Bluetooth ON/OFF

with the camera.
More information is available at the following website:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/
When pairing is complete, the camera and smartphone will automatically connect via Bluetooth. A smartphone icon and a white Bluetoothicon will appear in the camera display
when a connection is established.

N • Once the devices have been paired, the smartphone will automatically connect to the camera when the app is launched.
• Disabling Bluetooth when the camera is not connected to asmartphone reduces the drain on the battery.

259

Network/USB Features and Settings

4 Launch the app on the smartphone and pair the smartphone8

Using the Smartphone App
Read this section for information on the options available fordownloading pictures to your smartphone using the smartphone app.

N Before proceeding, select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONESETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF.

Selecting and Downloading Pictures Using the Smartphone App
You can download selected pictures to a smartphone using thesmartphone app.
Network/USB Features and Settings

8

N More information is available from the following website:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/

Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken
Pictures taken with ON selected for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONESETTING > AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB
setting menu will automatically be uploaded to the paired device.

N • If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF

and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device willcontinue even while the camera is off.
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > RESIZEIMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE in the network/USB setting menu enables compression, reducing file size for upload (P 281).
• Pictures are uploaded in the format chosen for Bluetooth/
SMARTPHONE SETTING > SELECT FILE TYPE in the network/USB
setting menu.

260

Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)Selecting Pictures for Upload in the Playback Menu
Use TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE &TRANSFER to select pictures for upload to a paired smartphoneor tablet via Bluetooth® (P 246).

Network/USB Features and Settings

8261

Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Connect to smartphones and computers via USB to upload
pictures from the camera.
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone
Before connecting to the smartphone to upload pictures via USB,
select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting
menu.

Network/USB Features and Settings

For Customers Using Android Devices
How you will connect the camera depends on the type of USB
connector with which your smartphone is equipped.
Type-C
Ready a cable equipped with connectors matching the USB(Type-C) connector on the camera.
Third-party USB cable8Type-C connector (plug)

Type-C connector (plug)

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.

262

Connecting to Smartphones (USB)

3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.

N If the smartphone asks for permission for an app other than the“Camera Importer” to access the camera, tap “Cancel” and moveon to the next step.

4 On your smartphone, tap the notification “Connected to USB
PTP”.

5 From the recommended apps, select “Camera Importer”.

The app will automatically start and allow you to import photos and movies to your smartphone.

N If the message “There is no MTP device connected” appears on the
Network/USB Features and Settings

app, please try again from step 3.

8263

For Customers Using iOS
An Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter is required.
Supplied USB cable

Type-C connector (plug)

An Apple Lightning to
USB Camera Adapter

Use an Apple Lightning to
USB Camera Adapter

Type-A connector (plug)
Network/USB Features and Settings

1 Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER
SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu.

2 Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.
3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.

Launch the Photos app to import photos and movies to yoursmartphone.

O • A Type-C to Type-C USB cable is required for connection to devices
equipped with USB Type-C connectors.
• The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to–
Lightning cable. Use an Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter.

8

264

Connecting to Smartphones (USB)

Connecting the Camera and Computer

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.
3 Turn the camera off.
4 Turn the computer on.
5 Connect a USB cable.

O The USB cable must be no more than 1 m (3.3 ft.) long and besuitable for data transfer.

6 Turn the camera on.
7 Copy pictures to your computer.

Network/USB Features and Settings

USB connector (Type-C)

8• Mac OS X/OS X/macOS: Pictures can be copied to your computer

using Image Capture (supplied with your computer) or other software. Use a card reader to copy files over 4 GB in size.
• Windows: Pictures can be copied to your computer using
apps supplied with the operating system.

265

Connecting to Smartphones (USB)O • Turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB cable.
• When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-

Network/USB Features and Settings

8serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to thecomputer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard.
• Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage tothe memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before connecting the camera.
• If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted,
there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be unable to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer
pictures.
• Make sure that the indicator lamp is off or lit green before turning
the camera off.
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage tothe memory card.
• Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards.
• In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a
network server using the software in the same way as on a standalone computer.
• Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or disconnect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is inprogress clears from the computer display. If the number of images
copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message hasceased to be displayed.
• The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company orInternet service provider when using services that require an Internet
connection.

266

Using the Camera as a Webcam
The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a
webcam.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Select USB WEBCAM for CONNECTION MODE.
3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turnthe camera on (P 265).
cam.

Network/USB Features and Settings

4 Select the camera in the app where it will be used as a web-

8267

instax SHARE Printers
Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE
printers.
Establishing a Connection
Select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) andpassword.

Network/USB Features and Settings

The Printer Name (SSID) and Password
The printer name (SSID) can be found on thebottom of the printer; the default password is“1111”. If you have already chosen a different
password to print from a smartphone, enter
that password instead.

8268

instax SHARE Printers

Printing Pictures
1 Turn the printer on.
2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax
PRINTER PRINT. The camera will connect to the printer.

PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
CONNECTING
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234

CANCEL

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to

PRINTER PRINT
100-0020

display the picture you want to print,then press MENU/OK.

CANCELN • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.

• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
4 The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start.

Network/USB Features and Settings

SET
instax-12345678

8

269

Uploading Files to Frame.io
Upload files to Frame.io (P 372).

N Confirm that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date before proceeding.

Connecting via Wireless LAN
Connect to Frame.io via wireless LAN.

1 Select NETWORK SETTING in the network/USB setting menu.
2 Select NOT CREATED.
WIRELESS LANABCDEFGHIJK

Network/USB Features and Settings

8

NOT CREATEDNOT CREATEDNOT CREATEDNOT CREATEDSSID

N You can also select or edit existing network.
3 Select ACCESS POINT SETTING.
Select IP ADDRESS SETTING tochoose the IP address manually as
described in “Connecting Using an IP
Address” (P 272).

4 Select SIMPLE SETUP.

WIRELESS LANACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTINGFINISHACCESS POINT SETTINGSIMPLE SETUPMANUAL SETUPSET UP CONNECTION TO
DESTINATION PC(SIMPLE BUTTON OPERATION)

N To select a wireless LAN router or enter the router SSID manually,choose MANUAL SETUP.

270

Uploading Files to Frame.io

5 Follow the on-screen instructions to

SIMPLE SETUP

ready the wireless LAN router.

PUSH WPS BUTTON ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER UNTIL LAMP ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER STARTS FLASHINGCONNECT BY PIN CODECANCELN You also have the option of connecting using a PIN. Display thecamera PIN by pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up and enter iton the wireless LAN router.

6 Press MENU/OK when setup is com-

SIMPLE SETUP

plete.

REGISTRATION COMPLETED

7 Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud >CONNECT in the network/USB settings menu.

CONNECTDISCONNECT
GET PAIRING CODE
SELECT FILE TYPEUPLOAD SETTINGNETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER

8 Once connected, select GET PAIRING
CODE.

A pairing code will be displayed.

NOT CONNECTEDWIRELESS LAN
AP001234567
SUCCESSGO TO Frame.io AND
ENTER PAIRING CODE TO CONNECT
GET PAIRING CODEFINISH

9 Sign in to Frame.io from a computer or other device and enter the pairing code displayed on the camera.

10 Upload files to Frame.io (P 274).

271

Network/USB Features and Settings

END
Frame.io Camera to Cloud

8

Connecting Using an IP Address
Connect to Frame.io using a manually-created network/USB setting profile giving the IP address and other network settings.

1 Select MANUAL.

WIRELESS LALANACCESS POP
POINT SETTINGAUTOIP ADDRES
ADDRESSSS SETTINGMANUALNEXT

000.000.000.000

N Select AUTO to assign the camera an IP address automatically.
Network/USB Features and Settings

2 Enter an IP address.

IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESSSUBNET MASKGATEWAY ADDRESSDNS SERVER ADDRESS• Select IP ADDRESS and enter an IP
address.

IP ADDRESS

SET

8• Select SUBNET MASK and enter asubnet mask.

272

ENTER

CANCELENTER

CANCELSUBNET MASK

SETUploading Files to Frame.io• Select GATEWAY ADDRESS and enter a gateway address.

GATEWAY ADDRESS

SET

ENTER

• Select DNS SERVER ADDRESS andenter a DNS server address.

CANCELDNS SERVER ADDRESS

SET

ENTER

CANCEL

Network/USB Features and Settings

Connection Status
The status of the connection to Frame.io isshown by an icon in the electronic viewfinderor LCD monitor.

Icon(white)(amber)(gray)(red)

Connection status
Connected to Frame.io.
Camera has temporarily suspended upload toFrame.io. To resume, select Frame.io Camera
to Cloud > UPLOAD SETTING > TRANSFER/SUSPEND > TRANSFER.
Not connected to Frame.io.
Frame.io server has set camera status to “paused”.
To restore connection, clear “paused” status using
computer or other device.

273

8

Uploading Items to Frame.io
Uploading Selected Items Using “Frame.io Camera to Cloud”

1 Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud in network/USB settingsmenu.

2 Select UPLOAD SETTING > SELECT
IMAGE & TRANSFER.

UPLOAD SETTINGSELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
TRANSFER/SUSPENDIMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
ROOT CERTIFICATENETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER

Network/USB Features and Settings

8

WIRELESS LANCONNECTEDAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAN • The NETWORK and Frame.io field show the status of the connection to Frame.io.
• The PROJECT and USER fields show information supplied to

Frame.io using a computer or other device. Note that somecharacters may not display correctly, in which case they will be
replaced by question marks (“?”).

3 Mark items for upload.

SELECT IMAGE
FRAME

Highlight photos and movies andpress MENU/OK to mark them for upload.
• To display only items that meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK before marking begins.
• To select all items, press the Q button.
• Selecting any two items with the AEL button also selects all
items between them.

274

SELECT ALL

SELECT RANGE

SELECT

FINISH/SETTINGUploading Files to Frame.io

4 Press DISP/BACK and select START

TRANSFER.
The selected items will be uploaded
to Frame.io.

SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGFINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
BACK

Filtering Items
To display only items that meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the selection dialog andselect FILTERING.

SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGFILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS

O Selecting FILTERING removes any existing upload marking.
N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 9999 items.
• If ON is selected for Frame.io Camera to Cloud > IMAGE TRANSFER

WHILE POWER OFF, upload will continue even while the camera isoff.

Network/USB Features and Settings

BACK

8

275

Uploading Files to Frame.io

Uploading Photos and Movies as They Are Taken
Photos and movies shot with ON selected for Frame.io Camera
to Cloud > UPLOAD SETTING > AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
in the network/USB setting menu are automatically marked for
upload.
Selecting Photos and Movies for Upload During Playback
If HFrame.io TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/DIALSETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can mark files for upload or change or remove their upload marking using the Fn1
button during playback.
Network/USB Features and Settings

8276RAW Processing
Using X RAW STUDIO, you can harness the power of thecamera’s image processing engine when processing RAW
pictures on a computer.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for CONNECTION
MODE.

3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
4 Launch X RAW STUDIO.

RAW processing can be performed using X RAW STUDIO.

N Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

Network/USB Features and Settings

the camera on (P 265).

8

277

Saving and Loading Settings
Camera settings can be saved to or loaded from computers
using FUJIFILM X Acquire.
Saving and Loading Settings Using a Computer

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for CONNECTION
MODE.

Network/USB Features and Settings

3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turnthe camera on (P 265).

4 Launch FUJIFILM X Acquire.

Camera settings can be saved or loaded using FUJIFILM X
Acquire.

N Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

8278

Network/USB Setting Menus
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
To access network/USB settings fromthe shooting or playback display, press
MENU/OK and select the I (network/USB
setting) tab.

NETWORK/USB SETTING

Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTINGAIRPLANE MODE
NETWORK SETTINGPRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
CONNECTION MODE
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
INFORMATION
EXIT

Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
Adjust Bluetooth-related settings as well as a variety of smartphone-related settings.
smartphone app.

PAIRING REGISTRATION
Pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet to which the smartphone app has been installed.
SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION
Choose a connection from a list of devices with which the camera has been paired using PAIRING REGISTRATION. Select NO
CONNECTION to exit without connecting.
DELETE PAIRING REG.
Delete existing pairing information for a smartphone or tablet.

N The selected device will be removed from the pairing list.

279

Network/USB Features and Settings

N Be sure your smartphone or tablet is running the latest version of the8Bluetooth DEVICE LIST
List the devices with which the camera is paired (other than thesmartphone) or end pairing with selected devices.
Bluetooth ON/OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will automatically connect withpaired smartphones or tablets running the smartphone app.
Options
ON

Network/USB Features and Settings

8

OFF

AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to upload pictures automatically as they are taken.
Options
ON

OFF

SMARTPHONE LOCATION SYNC.
Select ON to enable ongoing download of location data frompaired smartphones or tablets.
Options
ON

OFF

O Location data will only be downloaded while the smartphone app isrunning. Download will be interrupted if pairing is ended. The camera
location data icon will be displayed in red if location data have notbeen updated for over 30 minutes.

280

Network/USB Setting Menus

NAME
Choose a name (NAME) to identify the camera on the wirelessnetwork (the camera is assigned a unique name by default).
CONNECT WHILE POWER OFF
Select ON to maintain a Bluetooth connection with a smartphone even when the camera is turned off. With the smartphone
app FUJIFILM XApp, images can be transferred and the camera
can be turned on to take photos even when the camera is turned
off.
Options
OFF

IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to upload pictures topaired smartphones or tablets even while off.
OptionsON

OFF

RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE
Select ON (recommended) to enable compression, reducing filesize for upload.
Options
ONOFF

N • The pictures on the camera memory card are not affected.
• Compression is used only for pictures taken at sizes of L and M.

281

Network/USB Features and Settings

ON

8

WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING
Choose the band for wireless LAN connections.
Options
2.4GHz (IEEE802.11 b/g/n)

5GHz (IEEE802.11 a/n/ac)

O • Some countries and regions prohibit outdoor use of certain channels
in the 5 GHz band. Check whether use of the 5.2 GHz (W52) band ispermitted before selecting the 5 GHz option.
• The options available vary with the country or region of sale.

Network/USB Features and Settings

SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the types of files uploaded. You can select or deselecteach file type individually.
JPEG

8

282

OptionsRAW

HEIFNetwork/USB Setting Menus

AIRPLANE MODE
Select ON to disable the camera’s wireless LAN and Bluetoothfeatures.
Options
ON

OFF

NETWORK SETTING
Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks. Select a registered network and then select EDIT to change the selected network setting.
Description• SIMPLE SETUP: Connect to an access point using simple
settings.

ACCESS POINT
SETTINGIP ADDRESSSETTING• MANUAL SETUP: Manually adjust settings for connec-

tion to a wireless network. Choose the network from a list
(SELECT FROM NETWORK LIST) or enter the name manually (ENTER SSID).
• AUTO: The IP address is assigned automatically.
• MANUAL: Assign an IP address manually. Manually choose
the IP address (IP ADDRESS), subnet mask (SUBNET
MASK), gateway address (GATEWAY ADDRESS), and DNS
server address (DNS SERVER ADDRESS).

instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
Adjust settings for connection to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE
printers (P 268).

283

Network/USB Features and Settings

Option8

Frame.io Camera to Cloud
Adjust settings for use with Frame.io.
CONNECTYou can connect to the Frame.io project via wireless LAN.

N If you have not registered the network, register the network in the
NETWORK SETTING before proceeding.

DISCONNECT
End the connection to the Frame.io project and terminate the
network connection.
Network/USB Features and Settings

GET PAIRING CODEA pairing code will be displayed to connect to the Frame.io project. Enter this code on the Frame.io screen accessed from yourpersonal computer or tablet to connect Frame.io and the camera.
SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the types of files uploaded to Frame.io. You can select ordeselect each file type individually.
MOV/MP4
HEIF

8

284

Options
JPEG
TIFF

RAW

Network/USB Setting Menus

UPLOAD SETTING
Adjust settings Frame.io upload settings.
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
Mark picture for upload.
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to automatically mark photos and movies for uploadas they are taken.
Options
ON

OFF

Options
TRANSFERSUSPEND

IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, upload of files to Frame.io will continue while
the camera is off.
Options
ON

OFF

ROOT CERTIFICATE
Copy a root certificate to the camera for use with Frame.io.

Network/USB Features and Settings

TRANSFER/SUSPEND
Pause or resume upload to Frame.io.

8

OptionDescription
LOAD FROM STORAGE
Copy the root certiﬁcate from the camera memory card.
MEDIA
DELETE
Delete the current root certiﬁcate.

285

UPLOAD STATUS
View Frame.io upload status.
TRANSFER QUEUE
View a list of the files awaiting upload.
RESET TRANSFER ORDER
Remove upload marking from all files selected for upload toFrame.io.

Network/USB Features and Settings

8286

Network/USB Setting Menus

CONNECTION MODE
Adjust settings for connection to external devices.
OptionN For information on compatible computer software, see “Software andServices for Use with Your Camera” (P 370).

Network/USB Features and Settings

Description
Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automaticallyenables data transfer mode, allowing data to be copied to
USB CARD READER
the computer. The camera functions normally when not connected.
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use as a
USB WEBCAM
webcam.
Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatically enables USB RAW conversion/backup restore mode. The
camera functions normally when not connected.
USB RAW CONV. (requires FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO): Use the camUSB RAW CONV./ •era’s image processing engine to rapidly convert RAW ﬁles
BACKUP RESTORE
to other formats while maintaining image quality.
• BACKUP RESTORE (requires FUJIFILM X Acquire): Save and loadcamera settings. Reconﬁgure the camera in an instant orshare settings with other cameras of the same type.

8287

Network/USB Setting Menus

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
Choose whether USB connections to computers, smartphones,or other devices are used for power delivery or data transfer.
OptionDescription
The camera switches between power delivery and data transAUTO
fer automatically.
POWER SUPPLY ON/ The camera draws power from the connected device, reducing
COMM OFFthe drain on the battery. Data transfer is disabled.
POWER SUPPLY The camera can exchange data with, but not draw power from,
OFF/COMM ON the connected device.
Network/USB Features and Settings

8

O The camera cannot draw power from Lightning connections or fromdevices that do not supply power. Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM
ON before connecting the camera to such devices. The connection
may not be available for data transfer or the like when POWER SUPPLY
ON/COMM OFF is selected.

N Regardless of the option selected, the battery will charge while thecamera is off.

INFORMATION
View the camera’s MAC, Bluetooth, and wireless network IP addresses.
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING
Reset network/USB settings to default values.

288

The Setup Menus

289

USER SETTING
Adjust basic camera settings.
To access basic camera settings, press
MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, andchoose USER SETTING.

USER SETTINGFORMATbAREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
TIME DIFFERENCE
ax MY MENU SETTINGF MY MENU SETTINGSENSOR CLEANINGEXITFORMAT
To format a memory card:

1 Select D USER SETTING > FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab.
2 A confirmation dialog will be disFORMAT

played. To format the memory card,
highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

FORMAT OK?
ERASE ALL DATAOKCANCELThe Setup Menus

9

N To exit without formatting the memory card, select CANCEL orpress DISP/BACK.

O • All data—including protected pictures—will be deleted from thememory card. Be sure important files have been copied to a computer or other storage device.
• Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting.

N The format menu can also be displayed by pressing and holding

the center of the rear command dial while pressing and holding theb (Delete) button.

290

USER SETTINGb AREA SETTING
Adjust settings for your current time zone.
AREA SETTING
Choose your time zone from a map.
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
OptionON
OFF

Description
Daylight saving time on.
Daylight saving time oﬀ.

DATE/TIME
To set the camera clock:1 Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab.
2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the

3 Press MENU/OK to set the clock.

The Setup Menus

year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down tochange. To change the order in which the year, month, andday are displayed, highlight the date format and press thefocus stick up or down.

9291

TIME DIFFERENCE
Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone tothe local time at your destination when traveling. To specify thedifference between your local and home time zone:

O Use b AREA SETTING to choose your home time zone before selecting a local time zone using g LOCAL.

1 Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK.
2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the local timezone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete.

N Select ON to enable daylight saving time.
To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL andpress MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home timezone, select h HOME.
Optionsg LOCALh HOMEThe Setup Menus

N If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about threeseconds when the camera is turned on.

9292

USER SETTING

Qa
Choose a language.
x MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 331).
F MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 331).

The Setup Menus

9293

SENSOR CLEANING
Remove dust from the camera image sensor.
OptionOK

Description
Clean the sensor immediately.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is
WHEN SWITCHED ON
turned on.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns
WHEN SWITCHED OFF oﬀ (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the camera turns oﬀ in playback mode).

N Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed
using a blower (P 386).

SOUND & FLASH
Select OFF to disable the speaker, flash, illuminator, and self-timer lamp in situations in which camera sounds and lights may be
unwelcome.
OptionsON

OFF

The Setup Menus

FIRMWARE UPDATE
Use the firmware stored on a memory card to update the firmware for the camera, lenses, and other accessories (P 387).

9294

USER SETTINGRESETReset shooting or setup menu options to default values.

1 Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
OptionDescription
Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white
STILL MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all movie menu settings other than custom white
MOVIE MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME,
SET-UP RESET b AREA SETTING, TIME DIFFERENCE, and
COPYRIGHT INFO to default values.
Reset all settings other than custom white balance to
INITIALIZE
default values.

2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK andpress MENU/OK.

The Setup Menus

REGULATORY
To view electronic copies of the product model number, andother certificates, select D USER SETTING > REGULATORY in the
setup menu.

9295

SOUND SETTING
Make changes to camera sounds.
To access sound settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SOUND SET-UP.

SOUND SETTING

AF BEEP VOL.
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
OPERATION VOL.
FREC START/STOP VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUNDsELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUMEsELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
EXIT

AF BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera
focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)

SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer
is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
The Setup Menus

Optionsb (high)9296

c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)

SOUND SETTINGOPERATION VOL.
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera controls are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)

F REC START/STOP VOLUME
Choose the volume at the start and end of movie recording.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical orelectronic front-curtain shutter.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)

The Setup Menus

9297

tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the mechanical or electronic
front-curtain shutter.
i SOUND 1

Options
j SOUND 2

k SOUND 3

s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic
shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter.
i SOUND 1

The Setup Menus

9298

Options
j SOUND 2

k SOUND 3

SOUND SETTINGPLAYBACK VOLUME
Adjust the volume for movie playback.
0

1

2

3

4

Options
5

6

7

8

9

10

4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch movies.
OptionDescription

XLR

The camera plays audio recorded via external microphones connected via the XLR microphone adapter.

CAMERAThe camera plays audio recorded via the camera’s built-in
microphone or external microphones connected via themicrophone jack.

N You can also switch sources while viewing the playback display bypressing the center of the focus stick (focus lever).

The Setup Menus

9299

SCREEN SETTING
Make changes to display settings.
To access display settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SCREEN SET-UP.

SCREEN SETTING

VIEW MODE SETTINGEVF BRIGHTNESSEVF COLOREVF COLOR ADJUSTMENTLCD BRIGHTNESSLCD COLORLCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE DISP.
EXIT

VIEW MODE SETTING
Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic viewfinder), or LCD
monitor view modes (P 18).
EVF BRIGHTNESS
Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
OptionAUTO
The Setup Menus

9

MANUAL

Description
The camera automatically adjusts brightness around a selectedlevel in response to changes in ambient lighting conditions.
Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between −7
and +5.

EVF COLOR
Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
−5

300

−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

SCREEN SETTINGEVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the electronic viewfinder.

1 Adjust colors using the focus stick

EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT(focus lever).

SETCANCEL2 Press MENU/OK.
LCD BRIGHTNESS
Adjust monitor brightness.
−5

−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

LCD COLOR
Adjust monitor saturation.
−4

−3

−2

−1

LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor.

1 Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever).
2 Press MENU/OK.

The Setup Menus

−5

9

301

IMAGE DISP.
Choose how long images are displayed after shooting.
OptionCONTINUOUS
1.5 SEC
0.5 SECOFF

Description
Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the
shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus
point, press the center of the rear command dial; press again tocancel zoom.
Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
Pictures are not displayed after shooting.

N • Colors may differ slightly from those in the final image.
• “Noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities.
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
Choose whether the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor
rotate to match camera orientation.
OptionsON
The Setup Menus

9

302

OFF

SCREEN SETTINGPREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview
in manual exposure mode.
OptionDescription
PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview.
Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in
PREVIEW WB which exposure is likely to change during shooting, as may be
the case when you use a ﬂash during daylight.
Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this option in situations in which both exposure and white balanceOFF
are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when
you use a ﬂash with an incandescent monitoring lamp.

NATURAL LIVE VIEW
Choose whether the effects of film simulation, white balance,and other settings are visible in the monitor.
OptionOFF

The Setup Menus

ON

Description
The eﬀects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor,
but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hardto-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will diﬀer fromthose in the ﬁnal picture. The display will however be adjusted
to show the eﬀects of monochrome and sepia settings.
The eﬀects of ﬁlm simulation, white balance, and other settings
can be previewed in the monitor.

9303

F-Log VIEW ASSIST
Select ON to display a tone-corrected preview (equivalent toBT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies.
Options
ON

OFF

ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual
horizon display (P 25).
FRAMING GUIDELINE
Choose a framing grid for shooting mode.
OptionG GRID 24

F GRID 9

Display

The Setup Menus

9P

For “rule of thirds” composition.

P

H HD FRAMINGP

A six-by-four grid.

Frame HD pictures in thecrop shown by the lines at
the top and bottom of thedisplay.

N Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayedusing D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 23).

304

SCREEN SETTINGAUTOROTATE PB
Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation)
pictures during playback.
Options
ON

OFF

FOCUS SCALE UNITS
Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator.
Options
METERSFEETAPERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS
Choose whether the camera displays aperture as a T-number(used for movie camera lenses) or an f/-number (used for stillcamera lenses) when an optional FUJINON MKX-series lens is
attached. For information on using cinema lenses, see the documentation provided with the lens.
OptionF NUMBER305

The Setup Menus

T NUMBER

Description
A measure of lens aperture commonly used by cinematographers. Lens transmittance is taken into account to better calculate exposure.
A measure of lens aperture commonly used by photographers.
Lens transmittance is assumed to be 100%, meaning that thesame aperture may produce diﬀerent exposures depending on
the lens.

9

DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display(P 23).
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic viewfinder. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN
SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.

OFF

ON

O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 15).

N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, theThe Setup Menus

button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)and off (OFF) (P 339).

9306

SCREEN SETTINGLARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.

OFF

ON

O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 17).

N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, thebutton can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)and off (OFF) (P 339).

The Setup Menus

9307

LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed when
ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP >LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD).

LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING

Expo. DISP.
Scale
L1
L2
L3
L4
R1
R2

OptionA Expo. DISP.
B d Scale
C L1, L2, L3, L4
D R1, R2, R3, R4

Description
Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display.
Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to
deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK.
Select ON to display the exposure indicator.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the left sideof the screen.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the rightside of the screen.

INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
Adjust display contrast.
The Setup Menus

OptionDescription
HIGH CONTRAST
High contrast.
STANDARD
Normal contrast.
LOW CONTRAST
Low contrast.
DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting.

9308

SCREEN SETTINGLOCATION INFO
Select ON to display location info downloaded from a smartphone.
OptionsON

OFF

x Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it isdisplayed during still photography.
Options
TRANSPARENTBLACK

F Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it isdisplayed during movie recording.
Options
TRANSPARENTBLACK
The Setup Menus

9309

BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
Access options for camera controls.
To access control options, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING.

BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

FOCUS LEVER SETTING
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUFUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTINGCOMMAND DIAL SETTINGo S.S. OPERATIONCOMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
EXIT

FOCUS LEVER SETTING
Choose the functions performed by pressing the center of the
focus stick (focus lever) or by pressing the stick up, down, left, orright.
PUSH
OptionOFF

The Setup Menus

Description
Pressing the center of the stick has no eﬀect.
Press the center of the stick to choose the focus area size.
If g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECTEDIT FOCUS AREA
DETECTION SETTING is on, you can instead position thefocus frame over the desired face, eye, animal, or object.
Press the center of the stick to zoom in on the active focus
ZOOM
area (P 91).
RESET TO CENTER Press the center of the stick to select the center focus area.

9310

BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

TILT oOptionOFF
DIRECT AF POINT
SELECTIONEDIT FOCUS AREA

Description
Pressing the stick up, down, left, or right has no eﬀect.
Choose the focus area without leaving the shooting display.
Press the stick up, down, left, or right to view a focus-areadisplay and choose the focus area.

x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still photography (P 333).
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when filming
movies (P 333).
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons (P 339).
The Setup Menus

POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons available onsome power zoom lenses (P 345).

9311

COMMAND DIAL SETTING
Choose the roles played by the command dials.
OptionFRONT COMMAND
DIAL 1FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 2FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 3
FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 4

Description
Assign S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT), APERTURE, or FILMSIMULATION to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1.
Assign S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT), APERTURE, EXPOSURE
COMPENSATION, ISO, FILM SIMULATION, or NONE
to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2, FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 3, or FRONT COMMAND DIAL 4.

Assign S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT), APERTURE, EXPOSURE
REAR COMMAND DIAL COMPENSATION, ISO, FILM SIMULATION, or NONE tothe rear command dial.
DIAL SETTING can also be accessed by pressing andN • COMMAND
holding the center of the front command dial.
• You can also press the center of the front command dial to cycle
The Setup Menus

through settings in the order FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1, FRONTCOMMAND DIAL 2, FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3, and FRONTCOMMAND DIAL 4.

9312

BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGo S.S. OPERATION
Select OFF to disable shutter-speed fine-tuning using the command dials.
Options
ON

OFF

COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
Choose the direction in which the command dials are rotated tochoose values. Settings for the front and rear command dials canbe adjusted separately.
OptionDescription
Rotate the dial right for higher values or to move to the next
item.
Rotate the dial left for higher values or to move to the next
item.

The Setup Menus

9313

SHUTTER AF
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button ispressed halfway.
OptionAF-S

AF-C

Description• ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressedhalfway.
• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

SHUTTER AE
If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button ispressed halfway. The setting for focus mode C (AF-C) can be adjusted separately from that for modes S (AF-S) and M (manual focus).
Options
The Setup Menus

ON

OFF

N Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shottaken in burst mode.

9314

BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGSHOOT WITHOUT LENS
Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is attached.
Options
ON

OFF

SHOOT WITHOUT CARD
Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory
card inserted in the camera.
OptionON
OFF

Description
When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released totest camera function and the shooting and setup menus can bedisplayed.
The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing
accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card.

The Setup Menus

9315

LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING
Adjust settings for compatible lenses with focus rings or power zoom.
FOCUS RING ROTATE
Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to increase the focus distance.
Options
X CW (clockwise)Y CCW (counterclockwise)

FOCUS RING OPERATION
Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the movement of the focus ring.
OptionNONLINEAR
LINEARThe Setup Menus

9

Description
Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated.
Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is
rotated, but the focusing speed is unaﬀected by the speed thering is rotated.

F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (Fn)Choose the rate at which the focus distance changes when adjusted using function buttons during manual focus with compatible
power zoom lenses. The higher the number, the higher the rate.
Options1(SLOW)

316

2

3

4

5

6

7

8(FAST)BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGCONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn)Choose the rate at which compatible power zoom lenses can bezoomed in or out using function buttons. The higher the number, thehigher the rate.
Options1(SLOW)

2

3

4

5

6

7

8(FAST)

CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM/FOCUS (Fn) OPERATION
Choose whether the function buttons on compatible powerzoom lenses need only be pressed once to start and stop power
focus or power zoom.
OptionDescription
The operation starts when the button is pressed and stops
START/STOP SWITCH
when it is pressed a second time.
ACTIVE WHILE
The operation continues while the button is pressed and
PRESSING
stops when the button is released.

Options
X CW (clockwise)Y CCW (counterclockwise)

ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
Choose role played by the zoom/focus control ring on compatible power zoom lenses.
Options
ZOOM

FOCUS

317

The Setup Menus

ZOOM RING ROTATE
Choose whether to reverse the rotation of the zoom ring on compatible power zoom lenses.

9

AE/AF-LOCK MODE
This option determines the behavior of the button to which
exposure and/or focus lock is assigned.
OptionDescription
AE&AF ON WHEN
Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed.
PRESSING
AE&AF ON/OFF Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and remain locked until it is pressed again.
SWITCHAWB-LOCK MODE
Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance(AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white balance atthe value metered by the camera when WA WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO,
or AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY is selected for white balance.
OptionDescription
AWB ON WHEN
Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed.
PRESSINGAWB ON/OFF Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end
the lock.
SWITCHThe Setup Menus

9

APERTURE RING SETTING (A)Choose whether the front command dial can be used to adjust
aperture when aperture is set to A (auto).
OptionAUTO
COMMAND

318

Description
The camera adjusts aperture automatically.
Aperture can be adjusted using the front command dial.

BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

APERTURE SETTING
Choose the method used to adjust aperture when using lenses
with no aperture rings.
OptionAUTO +o MANUALAUTO
MANUAL

Description
Rotate the front command dial to choose the aperture. Rotate past
minimum aperture to choose A (auto).
Aperture is selected automatically; camera functions in exposure
mode P (program AE) or S (shutter-priority AE).
Rotate the front command dial to choose the aperture; camera
functions in exposure mode A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual).

a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING
Choose the role performed by the Fn1 button during playback.
Option319

The Setup Menus

Description
Pressing the button marks the current picture for transfer. If thea SMARTPHONE
camera is not currently paired with a smartphone, Bluetooth/
TRANSFER ORDER
SMARTPHONE SETTING options will be displayed.
Pressing the button displays a dialog where pictures can bed SELECT & selected for upload to a smartphone with which the camera
SMARTPHONE is paired (P 246). If the camera is not currently paired with
TRANSFER ORDER a smartphone, Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING options
will be displayed instead.
HFrame.io Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to
TRANSFER ORDER Frame.io.
r WIRELESSThe button can be used for wireless connections.
COMMUNICATION

9TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Enable or disable touch-screen controls.
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
OptionON
OFF

Description
The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting.
Touch controls disabled.

x DOUBLE TAP SETTING
OptionON
OFF

Description
Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during
shooting.
Touch zoom disabled.

c TOUCH FUNCTION

The Setup Menus

OptionON
OFF

Description
Enable touch-function gestures.
Disable touch-function gestures.

TOUCH ZOOM
Option
ON

9

OFF

320

Description
If the lens supports touch zoom, you can zoom in and out by
touching the LCD monitor (P 32).
Touch zoom disabled.

BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGa TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
OptionON
OFF

Description
The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback.
Touch controls disabled.

EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls whilethe viewfinder is active. The area used for touch controls can beselected from:
Description
All.
Right half.
Top right quarter.
Bottom right quarter.
Left half.
Top left quarter.
Bottom left quarter.
Touch controls disabled.

The Setup Menus

Option
6
0
2
4
1
3
5
OFF

9

321

BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGLOCK
Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation.
OptionDescription
Choose from the following:• UNLOCK: Reset lock options.
ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTIONLOCK SETTING •SELECTION list.
• SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in
the FUNCTION SELECTION list.
FUNCTION
SELECTION

Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION ischosen for LOCK SETTING.

N The controls selected using SELECTED FUNCTION can be locked at any

time during shooting by pressing and holding MENU/OK. To unlock thecontrols, press and hold the button again.

The Setup Menus

9322

POWER MANAGEMENT
Adjust power management settings.
To access power management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,and choose POWER MANAGEMENT.

POWER MANAGEMENTAUTO POWER OFFPERFORMANCEEVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

EXIT

AUTO POWER OFF
Choose the length of time before the camera turns off automatically when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase
battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned off
manually.
Options
5 MIN

2 MIN

1 MIN

30 SEC

15 SECOFF

OptionBOOSTNORMALECONOMYDescription
Boost camera focus and viewﬁnder display performance.
The battery drains faster than when is NORMAL selected.
Choose for standard focus and viewﬁnder display performance and battery endurance.
Limit autofocus and viewﬁnder performance. This option
oﬀers better battery endurance than does NORMAL.

323

The Setup Menus

PERFORMANCE
Select BOOST to improve focus and viewfinder display performance.

9

POWER MANAGEMENT

EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
Adjust the behavior of the EVF and LCD monitor when BOOST is
selected for PERFORMANCE.
Option
EVF/LCD LOW LIGHT
PRIORITYEVF/LCD RESOLUTIONPRIORITYEVF FRAME RATEPRIORITY (100P)

Description
Display brightness is adjusted to make subjects in shadows easier to see. Motion blur may cause ghosting.
Display resolution is increased to make details easier tosee.
The refresh rate for the EVF is increased, smoothing motion.

AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
If its temperature rises beyond a certain point, the camera will firstdisplay a message and then, if the temperature rise continues, automatically end shooting and power down. Choose the temperature
at which the camera turns off automatically.
OptionSTANDARD
The Setup Menus

HIGH

9

324

Description
The camera turns oﬀ automatically when its temperaturereaches the STANDARD value.
Shooting can continue at temperatures higher thanthe STANDARD value, extending the time available torecord movies and the like. Because remaining in contact
with the camera at these high temperatures could resultin low-temperature burns, this option should only be
used after mounting the camera on a tripod or taking
other steps to avoid prolonged contact with the camera.

SAVE DATA SETTING
Make changes to file management settings.
To access file management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP.

SAVE DATA SETTINGFRAME NO.
EDIT FILE NAME
SELECT FOLDERCOPYRIGHT INFOGEOTAGGINGEXIT

FRAME NO.
Frame number
New pictures are stored in image files named
using a four-digit file number assigned byadding one to the last file number used. The
Filefile number is displayed during playback as Directory
number number
shown. FRAME NO. controls whether file numbering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or
the current memory card is formatted.
OptionRENEW

N • If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will bedisabled. Turn the camera off and insert a formatted memory card
before resuming shooting.
• Selecting D USER SETTING > RESET sets FRAME NO. to
CONTINUOUS but does not reset the file number.
• Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may differ.

325

The Setup Menus

CONTINUOUS

Description
Numbering continues from the last ﬁle number used or the ﬁrst
available ﬁle number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to
reduce the number of pictures with duplicate ﬁle names.
Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a newmemory card is inserted.

9

EDIT FILE NAME
Change the file name prefix. sRGB images use a four-letter prefix(default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefix (“DSF”)
preceded by an underscore.
OptionsRGB
AdobeRGB

Default prefix
DSCF
_DSF

Sample file name
ABCD0001_ABC0001

SELECT FOLDER
Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent
pictures.
OptionSELECT FOLDER

CREATE FOLDERThe Setup Menus

9326

Description
To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be
stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down tohighlight an existing folder and press MENU/OK.
Enter a ﬁve-character folder name. The new folder will becreated with the next picture you take and subsequent
pictures will be stored in that folder.

SAVE DATA SETTINGCOPYRIGHT INFO
Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to
new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information
are reflected only in images taken after the changes are made.
OptionDescription
DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information.
ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO Enter the creator’s name.
ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder.
Delete the current copyright information. This change applies
DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO only to images taken after this option is selected; copyrightinformation recorded with existing images is not aﬀected.

GEOTAGGING
If ON is selected, location data downloaded from a smartphone
will be embedded in pictures as they are taken.
OptionsON

OFF

The Setup Menus

9

327

MEMO

328

Shortcuts

329

Shortcut Options
Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation.
Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a custom “my” menu or assigned to a function button or touch-function gesture for direct access:
Shortcut Option

Description
Add frequently-used options to this custom“My menu”
menu, which can be viewed by pressing
MENU/OK and selecting the E (“MY MENU”) tab.
The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button.
The Quick Menu
Use the Q menu to view or change the options
selected for frequently-used menu items.
Use the function buttons for direct access to
The function buttons
selected features.
Use touch function button ﬂick gestures (T-Fn1,
Touch-function
T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access togesturesselected features.
Use the function buttons on the lens (if any) for diLens function buttons
rect access to selected features.

Shortcuts

10

330

P
331

333
339
343
345

MY MENU
Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options.
To display “my menu”, press MENU/OK in theshooting display and select the E (MYMENU) tab.

MY MENU

SELF-TIMER
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTINGFILM SIMULATIONGRAIN EFFECT
PHOTOMETRYSHUTTER TYPEIS MODEgFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTINGEXITO The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to
MY MENU.
MY MENU SETTING
To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:

1 In the setup menu, select D USERSETTING > x MY MENU SETTING or
F MY MENU SETTING.

MY MENU SETTINGADD ITEMSRANK ITEMSREMOVE ITEMSN To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS. To delete items, select
REMOVE ITEMS.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up

IMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATION DIAL SETTINGFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECT
SELECT

Shortcutsor down to highlight ADD ITEMS andpress MENU/OK. Options that can be
added to “my menu” are highlighted
in blue.

x MY MENU SETTINGCANCEL

10

N Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks.

331

MY MENU

3 Select a menu to be registered and press the MENU/OK button.

Press the MENU/OK button again to return to the menu selection screen.

4 Select a menu to be registered next

and press the MENU/OK button. Selectthe order of the menus to be registered and press the MENU/OK button.

SELECT ITEM LOCATION

1 IMAGE SIZE
2 IMAGE QUALITY

MOVE

5 Repeat Step 4 and register “my menu”.

SAVE

To exit “my menu” registration, press the DISP/BACK button.

N “My menu” can contain up to 16 items.

Shortcuts

10

332

The Quick Menu
Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. Toview the quick menu, press the Q button.
The Quick Menu Display
The quick menu offers different options in photo and movie
modes. At default settings, it contains the following items:
Still photography

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
APERTURE PRIORITY AE

SETLONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM* If no settings bank is currently selected for x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING, the shooting mode will be displayed instead.

The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–P, which can be changed.

333

Shortcuts

Default
A x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING * I HIGHLIGHT TONE
B AF MODEJ SHADOW TONEFLASHFUNCTIONSETTINGCK DYNAMIC RANGE
WHITEBALANCED
L HIGH ISO NR
E EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESSM SELF-TIMER
g FACE/EYE DETECTIONF IMAGE SIZEN
SETTINGIMAGEQUALITYGO SUBJECT DETECTION SETTINGFILM
SIMULATION
H
P ISO

10

Movie recording

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
APERTURE PRIORITY AE

SETLONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

Default
A F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING * E
S.S. (MOVIE OPTIMIZEDCONTROL oL)
MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/CASPECT RATIOB

D F WHITE BALANCEAPERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZEDCONTROL oL)

F F ISO
G MOVIE MODE FRAME RATEHF WHITE BALANCE COLOR
TEMP. (WHEN k SELECTED)* If no settings bank is currently selected for F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING, the shooting mode will be displayed instead.
Shortcuts

The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–H, which can be changed.

10

334

The Quick Menu

Viewing and Changing Settings
1 Press Q to display the quick menu
during shooting.

2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
APERTURE PRIORITY AE

highlight items and rotate the rearcommand dial to change.

SET

LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

N To jump to the x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button
when the quick menu is displayed.

can assign the Q button roles normally reserved for the function
buttons or assign the Q button’s default role to a function button(P 339).
• To disable the Q (quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING > Q BUTTON SETTING.

335

Shortcuts

3 Press Q to exit when settings are complete.
N • The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls.
• Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you

10Editing the Quick Menu
To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:

1 Press and hold the Q button during
shooting.

N The camera displays the photo quick menu during still photography and the movie quick menu when in movie mode.

2 The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick(focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change andpress MENU/OK.

3 Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
The following can be assigned to the quick menu.

N The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.

Shortcuts

10

336

The Quick Menu

Available Items (Still Photography)
Choose from:• IMAGE SIZE• IMAGE QUALITY• FILM SIMULATION• GRAIN EFFECT• COLOR CHROME EFFECT• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT• DYNAMIC RANGE• D RANGE PRIORITY• WHITE BALANCE• WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHEN k SELECTED)• HIGHLIGHT TONE
• SHADOW TONE
• COLOR• SHARPNESS• CLARITY• HIGH ISO NR• AF MODE• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING• MF ASSIST• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• SELF-TIMER• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION• ISO• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING• FLASH COMPENSATION• MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
RATIO• MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
• BIT RATE
• HIGH SPEED REC• F IS MODE
• F IS MODE BOOST• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT• SOUND & FLASH• EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS• EVF/LCD COLOR• NONE
Shortcuts

N To disable the function button, choose NONE.

10

337

The Quick Menu

Available Items (Movies)• FILM SIMULATION• DYNAMIC RANGE• WHITE BALANCE• WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHEN k SELECTED)• HIGHLIGHT TONE
• SHADOW TONE
• COLOR• SHARPNESS• HIGH ISO NR• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING• MF ASSIST• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• PHOTOMETRY• MOVIE ISO• MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
RATIO• MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE

• BIT RATE
• HIGH SPEED REC• F SELF-TIMER• MOVIE AF MODE
• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION• F IS MODE
• F IS MODE BOOST• S.S.

(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)• APERTURE(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT• SOUND & FLASH• EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS• EVF/LCD COLOR• NONEN To disable the function button, choose NONE.

Shortcuts

10338

Function Controls
Assign a role to each function button or touch-function
gesture for quick access to the selected feature.
The Function Buttons
Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the selected feature.
Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:Back-of-Camera Function Buttons

Default
FILM SIMULATION
AF-ON
FOCUS CHECKAE LOCK ONLYQUICK MENU

Shortcuts

Function buttons
A Fn2 button
B AFON button
C Center of rear command dial
D AEL (exposure lock) button
E Q (quick menu) button

10

339

Front-of-Camera Function Buttons

Function buttons
A Fn1 button

Default
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF

Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons
The roles played by the function buttons can be selected using
the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu.

Shortcuts

10• IMAGE SIZE• IMAGE QUALITY• RAW• FILM SIMULATION• GRAIN EFFECT• COLOR CHROME EFFECT• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT• DYNAMIC RANGE• D RANGE PRIORITY• WHITE BALANCE• CLARITY• SELECT CUSTOM SETTING• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING

340• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK• AF MODE• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF• AF RANGE LIMITER• FOCUS CHECK LOCK• MF ASSIST ON/OFF• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• PRE-SHOT sJ• SELF-TIMER• AE BKT SETTING

Function Controls• FOCUS BKT SETTING• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING• ISO• IS MODE• DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION• FLASH COMPENSATION• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING• TTL-LOCK• MODELING FLASH• MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE• HIGH SPEED REC• F SELF-TIMER• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION• F IS MODE BOOST• ZEBRA SETTING• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL• CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT• VIEW MODE SETTING• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)• AE LOCK ONLY
• AF LOCK ONLY
• AE/AF LOCK
• AF-ON• AWB LOCK ONLY
• APERTURE SETTING• LOCK SETTING• PERFORMANCE• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER• SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION• Bluetooth ON/OFF• QUICK MENU
• PLAYBACK• NONE
Shortcuts

N To disable the function button, choose NONE.

10

341

AF-ON
Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus.
MODELING FLASHIf MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mounted flash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fire theflash and check for shadows and the like (modeling flash).
TTL-LOCK
If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock flash
output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING >TTL-LOCK MODE (P 185).
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
Controls to which RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING has been assigned can be pressed to temporarily recall the settings saved to
C1 (CUSTOM 1). Pressing the button a second time restores theprevious settings.

Shortcuts

10342

Function Controls

Touch-Function Gestures
Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4)
for quick access to selected features.

N Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func-tion gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.

Touch-Function Gesture Defaults
The default assignments for the different gestures are:

Default
HISTOGRAM
FILM SIMULATIONELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
AF MODE

Shortcuts

Touch-Function Gestures
A T-Fn1 (flick up)
B T-Fn2 (flick left)
C T-Fn3 (flick right)
D T-Fn4 (flick down)

10

343

Assigning Roles to Touch-Function Gestures
The roles played by touch-function gestures can be selected using the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
option in the setup menu.

Shortcuts

10• IMAGE SIZE• IMAGE QUALITY• RAW• FILM SIMULATION• GRAIN EFFECT• COLOR CHROME EFFECT• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT• DYNAMIC RANGE• D RANGE PRIORITY• WHITE BALANCE• CLARITY• SELECT CUSTOM SETTING• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK• AF MODE• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF• AF RANGE LIMITER• FOCUS CHECK LOCK• MF ASSIST ON/OFF• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• PRE-SHOT sJ• SELF-TIMER• AE BKT SETTING• FOCUS BKT SETTING

344• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING• ISO• IS MODE• DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION• FLASH COMPENSATION• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING• TTL-LOCK• MODELING FLASH• HIGH SPEED REC• F SELF-TIMER• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION• F IS MODE BOOST• ZEBRA SETTING• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL• CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT• VIEW MODE SETTING• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL
MODE• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH

Function Controls• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• APERTURE SETTING• LOCK SETTING• PERFORMANCE• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER• SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION• Bluetooth ON/OFF• QUICK MENU
• PLAYBACK• NONEN To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE.
Lens Function Buttons
Choose the roles played by the function buttons on the lens
(where applicable).
Lens Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:

N A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.

Shortcuts

Lens function button
Default
ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RINGA Z/FCONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)B L-Fn1 (rocker zoom button pressed up)
C L-Fn2 (rocker zoom button pressed down) CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)

10

345

Assigning Roles to the Lens Function Buttons
The roles played by the lens function buttons can be selectedusing the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > POWER ZOOM LENSFUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu.

Shortcuts

10• IMAGE SIZE• IMAGE QUALITY• RAW• FILM SIMULATION• GRAIN EFFECT• COLOR CHROME EFFECT• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT• DYNAMIC RANGE• D RANGE PRIORITY• WHITE BALANCE• CLARITY• SELECT CUSTOM SETTING• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK• AF MODE• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF• AF RANGE LIMITER• FOCUS CHECK LOCK• MF ASSIST ON/OFF• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• PRE-SHOT sJ• SELF-TIMER• AE BKT SETTING• FOCUS BKT SETTING

346• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING• ISO• IS MODE• DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION• FLASH COMPENSATION• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING• TTL-LOCK• MODELING FLASH• MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE• HIGH SPEED REC• F SELF-TIMER• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION• F IS MODE BOOST• ZEBRA SETTING• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL• CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT• VIEW MODE SETTING• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH

Function Controls• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• AWB LOCK ONLY
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST• APERTURE SETTING• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• LOCK SETTING• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)• PERFORMANCE• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)• SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)• Bluetooth ON/OFF• AE LOCK ONLY• QUICK MENU
• AF LOCK ONLY
• PLAYBACK• AE/AF LOCK• NONE• AF-ONN • To disable the function button, choose NONE.
• Selected function lock is not available when CONSTANT SPEEDZOOM (T) or CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W) is assigned to a lensfunction button (P 322).

Shortcuts

10

347

MEMO

348

Peripherals and Optional
Accessories

349

Lenses
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
Lens Parts

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

A Lens hood
B Mounting marks
C Focus ring
D Zoom ring
E Aperture ring

F Mounting marks (focal length)
G Aperture mode switch
H Lens signal contacts
I Front lens cap
J Rear lens cap

N A XF16-50mmF2.8-4.8 R LM WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.

11

350

Lenses

Lens Care• Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry
cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently
with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied.
• Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use.
Removing Lens Caps
Remove lens caps as shown.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

O Lens caps may differ from those shown.

11

351

Attaching Lens Hoods
When attached, lens hoods reduce glareand protect the front lens element.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

352

Lenses

Lenses with Aperture Rings
At settings other than A, you can adjust
aperture by rotating the lens aperturering (exposure modes A and M).

A 16 11 8 5.6 4 2.8

A 16 11 8 5.6 4

Aperture ringN • Selecting ON for MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL disables theaperture ring.
• When the aperture ring is set to A, rotate the command dials to adjust
aperture.

The Aperture Mode Switch
If the lens has an aperture mode switch, aperture can be adjusted manually by sliding theswitch to Z and rotating the aperture ring.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Aperture ring
Aperture mode switch

11

353

Lenses with No Aperture Rings
Aperture can be adjusted using the front
command dial in modes A (aperture-priority AE) and M (manual).

N Aperture control can be reassigned to the rear command dial using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

Lenses with O.I.S. Switches
If the lens supports optical image stabilization (O.I.S.), the image stabilization mode can be chosen in the camera
menus. To activate image stabilization,slide the O.I.S. switch to ON.
O.I.S. switch
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

354

LensesManual Focus Lenses
Slide the focus ring to the front for autofocus.

For manual focus, slide the focus ring to
the back and rotate it while checking theresults in the camera display. The focus
distance and depth-of-field indicators
can be used to assist manual focus.

O Note that manual focus may not be available in all shooting modes.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

The Depth-of-Field Indicator
The depth-of-field indicator shows the approximate depth of field (the distance in front of andbehind the focus point that appears to be infocus). The indicator is displayed in film format.

11

355

Lenses

Power Zoom Lenses
Zoom can be adjusted on power zoom lenses using the zoom/
focus control ring, zoom button, or zoom ring.

O Adjusting zoom while the lens is wet makes it easier for water to findits way inside the lens. Wipe any water from the lens before adjustingzoom.

N A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

Control
A Zoom ring

Description
Rotate the zoom ring to zoom in or out manually.
Rotate the zoom/focus control ring to zoom in or out
B Zoom/focus control ring using powered zoom. The zoom speed is proportional
to the speed with which the ring is rotated.
Switch the role of zoom/focus control ring from focus
C Z/F (zoom/focus) button
to zoom or vice versa.
Press a zoom button to zoom in or out at a steadyspeed using powered zoom. Zoom ends when the
D Zoom buttons
button is pressed a second time.

N • The Z/F and zoom buttons can be assigned other roles using

D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn)SETTING.
• The speed at which zoom can be adjusted via the zoom buttons canbe chosen using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS
SETTING.

356

External Flash Units
Use optional external flash units for flash photography.
Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be usedat shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed, whileothers can function as commanders controlling remoteunits via optical wireless flash control.

O You may be unable to test-fire the flash in some circumstances, for example when a setup menu is displayed on the camera.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when FLASH is selected for F FLASHSETTING > RED EYE REMOVAL. Red-eye removal minimizes “red-eye”
caused when light from the flash is reflected from the subject’s retinas.
Flash Sync Speed
The flash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of 1⁄180 s or slower.
Optional Flash Units from Fujifilm
The camera can be used with optional Fujifilm shoe-mounted flash units.
Third-Party Flash Units
Do not use third-party flash units that apply over 300 V to the camera hot
shoe. Set the flash control mode to M when using a flash unit that does notsupport TTL flash control.

11

357

Using an External Flash

1 Connect the unit to the camera.
2 In shooting mode, select FLASHFUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASHSETTING) menu tab. The options
available vary with the flash unit.

FLASH SETTINGFLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVALTTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTINGCOMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
EXIT

Description
P
Displayed when the built-in ﬂash is raised.
121
Sync terminal options will be displayed if the builtSYNC TERMINAL in ﬂash is lowered and either no ﬂash unit, or an in- 359
compatible ﬂash unit, is mounted on the hot shoe.
Displayed when an optional ﬂash unit other than
SHOE MOUNT FLASH the EF-X8 is mounted on the hot shoe and turned 360
on.
Displayed if an optional ﬂash unit functioning as
COMMANDER
a commander for Fujiﬁlm optical wireless remote 363(OPTICAL)
ﬂash control is connected and turned on.
Menu
Built-In Flash

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

3 Highlight items using the focus stick

MODE
Built-In Flash(focus lever) and rotate the rear command dial to change the highlighted
setting.
ADJUST

4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into effect.

11

358

END

External Flash UnitsSYNC TERMINALSYNC TERMINAL is displayed if the built-in flash is lowered andeither no flash unit, or an incompatible flash unit, is mounted on
the hot shoe.
MODE
SYNC TERMINAL

ADJUST

END

Setting

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Description
Choose from the following options:• M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts
when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower thanA Flash control mode the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if theunit uses long ﬂashes or has a slow response time.
• D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled.
Choose whether the ﬂash is timed to ﬁre immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
B Syncit closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended inmost circumstances.

11

359

SHOE MOUNT FLASHThe following options are available when an optional
shoe-mounted flash unit is attached and turned on.
MODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH

ADJUST

Setting

END

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Description
The ﬂash control mode selected with the ﬂash unit. This canin some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options available vary with the ﬂash.
• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust ﬂash compensation (B).
• M: The ﬂash ﬁres at the selected output regardless of subject
A Flash control mode brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be
adjusted from the camera (B).
• MULTI: Repeating ﬂash. Compatible shoe-mounted ﬂash
units will ﬁre multiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): The ﬂash does not ﬁre. Some ﬂash units can beturned oﬀ from the camera.

11

360

External Flash Units

Setting

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Description
The options available vary with ﬂash control mode.
• TTL: Adjust ﬂash compensation (the full value may not beapplied if the limits of the ﬂash control system are exceeded). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the selected value is added to the value selected with the ﬂash unit.
B Flash compensation/ • M/MULTI: Adjust ﬂash output (compatible units only).
outputChoose from values expressed as fractions of full power,
from ⁄ (mode M) or ¼ (MULTI) down to ⁄ in increments
equivalent to ⁄ EV. The desired results may not be achieved
at low values if they exceed the limits of the ﬂash control
system; take a test shot and check the results.
Choose a ﬂash mode for TTL ﬂash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The ﬂash ﬁres only as required; ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the ﬂash will ﬁre when the photo is taken.
F (STANDARD): The ﬂash ﬁres with every shot if possible;•
C Flash mode (TTL) ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully charged when the shutter isreleased.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ﬂash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.

11

361

Setting

D SyncE ZoomF Lighting
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

G LED light
G Number of flashes *H Frequency *Description
Control ﬂash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately before the
shutter closes.
• R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ﬂash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for ﬂash control mode.
Note: Horizontal bands may appear in pictures taken using
AUTO FP(HSS) at some shutter speeds.
The angle of illumination (ﬂash coverage) for units that support ﬂash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to bemade from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing
coverage.
• K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage formore even lighting.
Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photography (compatible units only): as a catchlight (M/CATCHLIGHT),
as an AF-assist illuminator (N/AF ASSIST), or as both a catchlight and an AF-assist illuminator (O/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT).
Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography.
Choose the number of times the ﬂash ﬁres each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the frequency at which the ﬂash ﬁres in MULTI mode.

* Full value may not be applied if limits of ﬂash control system are exceeded.

11

362

External Flash Units

COMMANDER(OPTICAL)The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning
as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control.
MODE
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)

ADJUST

END

B

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control offers a choice offour channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of opticalsignals between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
The flash units can also be placed in up to
three groups (A, B, and C) and flash modeCand flash level adjusted separately forAeach group.

11

363

Setting

A Flash control mode(group A)

B Flash control mode(group B)

C Flash control mode(group C)

D Flash compensation/
output (group A)
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

E Flash compensation/
output (group B)

F Flash compensation/
output (group C)

11

364

Description
Choose ﬂash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%
is available for groups A and B only.
• TTL: The units in the group ﬁre in TTL mode. Flash compensation can be adjusted separately for each group.
• TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you canspecify the output of the selected group as a percentage of the other and adjust overall ﬂash compensation
for both groups.
• M: In mode M, the units in the group ﬁre at the selected
output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardlessof subject brightness or camera settings.
• MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units
in all groups to repeating ﬂash mode. All units will ﬁremultiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will
not ﬁre.
Adjust ﬂash level for the selected group according tooption selected for ﬂash control mode. Note that the fullvalue may not be applied if the limits of the ﬂash control
system are exceeded.
• TTL: Adjust ﬂash compensation.
• M/MULTI: Adjust ﬂash output.
• TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B andadjust overall ﬂash compensation.

External Flash Units

Setting

G Flash mode (TTL)I ZoomPeripherals and Optional Accessories

H SyncDescription
Choose a ﬂash mode for TTL ﬂash control. The options
available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The ﬂash ﬁres only as required; ﬂash
level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A
p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressedhalfway indicates that the ﬂash will ﬁre when the photois taken.
• F (STANDARD): The ﬂash ﬁres with every shot if possible; ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully charged when the
shutter is released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ﬂash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The ﬂash will not ﬁre if not
fully charged when the shutter is released.
Control ﬂash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately after the
shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately before the
shutter closes.
• R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ﬂash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for ﬂash control mode.
The angle of illumination (ﬂash coverage) for units that support ﬂash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to bemade from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.

11

365

External Flash Units

Setting

J Lighting

K Commander

K Number of flashes
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

L Channel
L Frequency

11

366

Description
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage.
• K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coveragefor more even lighting.
Choose the group for units functioning as a commander for Fujiﬁlm optical wireless remote ﬂash control in TTL,
TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clipon ﬂash units that support Fujiﬁlm optical wireless remoteﬂash control.
• Gr A: Assign the commander to group A.
• Gr B: Assign the commander to group B.
• Gr C: Assign the commander to group C.
• OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that
does not aﬀect the ﬁnal picture.
Choose the number of times the ﬂash ﬁres each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the channel used by the commander for communication with the remote ﬂash units. Separate channels
can be used for diﬀerent ﬂash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
Choose the frequency at which the ﬂash ﬁres in MULTI
mode.

Technical Notes

367

Accessories from Fujifilm
The following accessories are available from Fujifilm. For thelatest information on the accessories available in your region, check with your local Fujifilm representative or visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
NP-W126S: Additional high-capacity NP-W126S rechargeable batteries can be purchased as required.
Battery chargers
BC-W126S: Replacement battery chargers can be purchased as required. At+20 °C/+68 °F, the BC-W126S charges an NP-W126S in about 150 minutes.
Remote releases
RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time
exposure. The RR-100 has a connector with a diameter of 2.5 mm; a third-party⌀2.5 mm to 3.5 mm adapter is required for connection to the camera.
Stereo microphones
MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording.

FUJINON lenses
XF-/XC-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
FUJINON MKX-series lenses: Cinema lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount.
Macro extension tubes
MCEX-11/16: Attach between the camera and the lens to shoot at high reproduction ratios.

Technical Notes

Teleconverters
XF1.4X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 1.4×.
XF2X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 2.0×.
Mount adapters
FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER: Allows the camera to be used with a wide selectionof M-mount lenses.

12368

Accessories from Fujifilm

Shoe-mounted flash units
EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL ﬂash control, this clip-on ﬂash unit has a
Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the ﬂash sync speed. Featuring
support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fujiﬁlm optical wireless ﬂash
control, it can be used as a commander or remote ﬂash unit for remote wirelessﬂash photography.
EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 ﬂash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries.
EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL ﬂash control, this clip-on ﬂash unit has a
Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the ﬂash sync speed. It can also
be used as remote ﬂash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless commander.
EF-W1: With support for the NAS * wireless communication standard developedby Nissin Japan, this wireless ﬂash commander can be used with optional EF-60
clip-on ﬂash units and other NAS-compliant units.
* NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd.
EF-42: This clip-on ﬂash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) andsupports manual and TTL ﬂash control.
EF-X20: This clip-on ﬂash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) andsupports manual and TTL ﬂash control.
EF-20: This clip-on ﬂash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) andsupports TTL ﬂash control (manual ﬂash control is not supported).
Tripod grips
TG-BT1: Record movies, take photographs, or adjust zoom on compatible powerzoom lenses while holding this Bluetooth tripod grip.
Grip belts
GB-001: Improves grip.
Technical Notes

Body caps
BCP-001: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached.

instax SHARE printers
SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax ﬁlm.

12369

Software and Services for Use with Your
CameraThe camera can be used with the following software andservices. For the latest information on software available
from Fujifilm, visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Smartphone Apps
Establish a wireless connection between your camera and asmartphone or tablet.
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIXRAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conversion software from Adwaa Co., Ltd. View RAW pictures on
your computer and convert them into other formats. RAW FILECONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free of charge
from the Fujifilm website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converterex-powered-by-silkypix/

N • “RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX” is supplied by Adwaa
Co., Ltd.
• For information on when support will be available, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-expowered-by-silkypix/

Technical Notes

12370

Software and Services for Use with Your Camera

FUJIFILM RAW Converter
View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats. FUJIFILM RAW Converter is available free of charge
from Capture One A/S.
https://www.captureone.com/a/leaflet-fujifilm#rawconverter

N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available.

Capture One
Capture One workflow software from Capture One A/S supports
tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pictures into otherformats.
https://www.captureone.com/a/leaflet-fujifilm

O The camera does not support tethered photography.
N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available.

FUJIFILM X Acquire
Save and load camera settings. Reconfigure the camera in an instant or share settings with other cameras of the same type.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/

O The camera does not support tethered photography.

Technical Notes

12
371

Software and Services for Use with Your Camera

FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO can use the camera’s unique image processing
engine to rapidly convert RAW files to create high-quality images
in other formats.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
Send still images and movies directly from the camera to the
Frame.io platform via a network.
https://frame.io/

Technical Notes

12372

For Your Safety
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONSInstructions: All the safety and operating instructions Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed• Read Instructions
should be read before the appliance is operated.

so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by

Instructions: The safety and operating instructions items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten• Retain Instructions

Ground Clamps
hered to. This video product should never be placed near orover a radiator or heat register.
Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by Power Service Grounding Electrodethe video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. System (NEC ART 250. PART H)

Grounding
Conductors (NECSECTION 810-21)

Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near water—for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink,or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool,and the like.

Technical Notes

should be retained for future reference.
tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the where they exit from the appliance.
• Heed Warnings
operating instructions should be adhered to.
Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable
Instructions All operating and use instructions cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may• Follow Instructions:should be followed.
fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
Installation
Power Sources: This video product should be operated only bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or soldfrom the type of power source indicated on the marking la- with the video product. Any mounting of the appliancebel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com- use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacpany. For video products intended to operate from battery turer.
power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. An appliance and cart combination
Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped should be moved with care. Quickwith a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having stops, excessive force, and unevenone blade wider than the other). This plug will ﬁt into the surfaces may cause the appliance andpower outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are cart combination to overturn.
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing
the plug. If the plug should still fail to ﬁt, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety Antennas
Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cablepurpose of the polarized plug.
system is connected to the video product, be sure the anAlternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide somea three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
(grounding) pin. This plug will only ﬁt into a grounding-type Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding ofinsert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re- the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-inplace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conof the grounding type plug.
ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection toOverloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
cords as this can result in a risk of ﬁre or electric shock.
electrode.
Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS
for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prodPER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings
Antenna Lead
Ground Clamp
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should neverin Wirebe blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug,
AntennaAnor other similar surface.
Discharge Unit
D
Electric Servicee EquipmenttThis video product should not be placed in a built-in instal(NECN SECTION
lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is8810-20)provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been ad-

12373

Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat- Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product fromed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualiﬁed service personlight or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power nel under the following conditions:lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, • When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such • If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into thepower lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
video product.
• If the video product has been exposed to rain or water.
Use
If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has
Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be- •been damaged.
fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
If the video product does not operate normally follow the
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are
Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustthis video product through openings as they may touch dan- ment of other controls may result in damage and will often
gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in require extensive work by a qualiﬁed technician to restore
a ﬁre or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the the video product to its normal operation.
video product.
When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perforLightning: For added protection for this video product re- mance — this indicates a need for service.
ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended
Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be
and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
sure the service technician has used replacement parts specoutlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
iﬁed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics asprevent damage to the video product due to lightning andthe original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in
power-line surges.
ﬁre, electric shock or other hazards.
Service
Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs toServicing: Do not attempt to service this video product this video product, ask the service technician to perform
yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to safety checks to determine that the video product is in propdangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to er operating condition.
qualiﬁed service personnel.

Be sure to read these notes before use
Safety Notes• Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read thesesafety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use.

AC

• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.

DC

About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product isused incorrectly as a result.
This icon indicates that death or serious inWARNING jury can result if the information is ignored.

Technical Notes

12

The symbols on the product (including the accesories) represent the following:This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that theaction indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).

374

Class II equipment (The construction of the productis double-insulated.)WARNING
If a problem arises, turn the camera off, remove the battery, and disconnect the USB cable. Continued use of
the camera when it is emitting smoke, is emitting
Unplugany unusual odor, or is in any other abnormal statefrom power
can cause a ﬁre or electric shock. Contact your Fusocket
jiﬁlm dealer.
Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the camera or connecting cables. Do not use the camera orconnecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt
water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids.
Should liquid find its way into the camera or connecting
cables, turn the camera off, remove the battery, anddisconnect the USB cable. Continued use of the camera can cause a ﬁre or electric shock. Contact yourFujiﬁlm dealer.

For Your Safety
WARNING
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This
Do not use in can cause a ﬁre or electric shock.
the bathroomor shower

Do notdisassemble

Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never open the case). Failure to observe this precaution
can cause ﬁre or electric shock.

Should the case break open as the result of a fall or otheraccident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shockor in injury from touching the damaged parts. ReDo not touch
internal move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
parts
injury or electric shock, and take the product to thepoint of purchase for consultation.
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connection cord and do not place heavy objects on the connection cord. These actions could damage the cord andcause a ﬁre or electric shock. If the cord is damaged,
contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer. Do not use cables withbent connectors.
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. Thiscan cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause
injury.
Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do notuse shooting, playback, or any other operationsof the camera while operating a car or other vehicle. This can result in you falling down or being
involved in a traﬃc accident. If you take pictures
while walking, pay attention to your surroundings.
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during athunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due
to induced current from the lightning discharge.
Do not use the battery except as specified. Load thebattery as shown by the indicator.

Do not use the charger to charge batteries other thanthose specified here. The supplied charger is for use
only with batteries of the type supplied with thecamera. Using the charger to charge conventional
batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries
can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst.
Using a flash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
visual impairment. Take particular care when photographing infants and young children.
Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in
low-temperature burns, particularly during prolonged use, at high ambient temperatures, when
HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.,
or with users who suﬀer from poor circulation or
reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod orsimilar precautions are recommended.
Do not use in the presence of flammable objects, explosive gases, or dust.
When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover thebattery terminals with insulation tape. Contact withother metallic objects or batteries could cause thebattery to ignite or burst.
Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small partsout of the reach of small children. Children may
swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical
attention or call emergency.
Keep out of reach of small children. Among the elements that could cause injury are the strap, which
could become entangled about a child’s neck,causing strangulation, and the ﬂash, which could
cause visual impairment.
Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
This product generates radio-frequency emissions
that could interfere with navigational or medical
equipment.

Use only batteries specified for use with this camera. Do
not use voltages other than the power supply voltage
shown. The use of other power sources can cause
a ﬁre.

Technical Notes

Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or otherabnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects.
Failure to observe these precautions could resultin the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, orleaking, causing ﬁre, burns, or other injury.

WARNING
If the battery leaks and fluid gets in contact with youreyes, skin or clothing, flush the affected area with cleanwater and seek medical attention or call an emergency
number right away.

12375

CAUTION
Do not use this camera in locations affected by oil
fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a ﬁreor electric shock.
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in locations such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight.
This can cause a ﬁre.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This cancause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause
injury.
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the charger in a clothor blanket. This can cause heat to build up and distort the casing or cause a ﬁre.
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fit
securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this precaution could result in ﬁre or electric shock.
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan
to use the camera for an extended period, remove thebattery. Failure to do so can cause a ﬁre or electric
shock.
When charging ends, unplug the charger from thepower socket. Leaving the charger plugged into thepower socket can cause a ﬁre.
When a memory card is removed, the card could comeout of the slot too quickly. Use your finger to hold it andgently release the card. Injury could result to thosestruck by the ejected card.
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting
in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing
it from the camera.
Request regular internal testing and cleaning for yourcamera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause
a ﬁre or electric shock. Contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer
to request internal cleaning every two years. Please
note that this service is not free of charge.
Dispose of the product in accord with location regulations.

Technical Notes

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.

12376

For Your Safety
The Battery and Power Supply
Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read L Cautions: Handling the Battery
the appropriate sections.
• Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neckWARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat laces or hairpins.
• Do not expose to ﬂame or heat.
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
Do not disassemble or modify.
The following describes the proper use of batteries and how •Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures.
to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or •• Use with designated chargers only.
cause leakage, overheating, ﬁre, or explosion.
• Dispose of used batteries promptly.
Li-ion Batteries• Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks.
Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion • Do not expose to water.
battery.
• Keep the terminals clean.
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery • The battery and camera body may become warm to thetouch after extended use. This is normal.
before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use.
L Caution: Disposal
L Notes on the Battery
The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations.
Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects ofCharge the battery one or two days before use.
battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate.
Battery life can be extended by turning the camera oﬀ when
Do not mechanically crush or split batteries.
not in use.

Technical Notes

Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted
battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged
spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary,or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place andinsert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place thebattery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating
devices.
L Charging the Battery
The battery can also be charged using an optional BC-W126S
battery charger. Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below +10 °C (+50 °F) or above +35 °C (+95 °F). Do
not attempt to charge the battery at temperatures above+40 °C (+104 °F); at temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), thebattery will not charge.
Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery
does not however need to be fully discharged before charging.
The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after
charging or use. This is normal.
L Battery Life
A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery willhold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its service life and should be replaced.
L Storage
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store
it at room temperature with the battery charged to approximately one half to ⁄ capacity.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient
temperature of from +15 °C to +25 °C (+59 °F to +77 °F). Do
not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature.

12377

Using the Camera• Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, Trademark Information

Technical Notes

including artiﬁcial light sources or natural light sources Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark ofsuch as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or
precaution could damage the camera image sensor.
registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces• Strong sunlight focused through the viewﬁnder may dam- included herein are solely developed by DynaComware
age the panel of electronic viewﬁnder (EVF). Do not aim Taiwan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS,
the electronic viewﬁnder at the sun.
Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks ofApple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a
Take Test Shotsregistered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as
and other countries. Android is a trademark or registeredat weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a
trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Camera
test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is
to Cloud, Frame.io, Lightroom and Photoshop are either
functioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the United
liability for damages or lost proﬁts incurred as a result ofStates and/or other countries. Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
product malfunction.
logo, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup® are registered trademarks ofNotes on Copyrightthe Wi-Fi Alliance®. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., andusing your digital camera system cannot be used in ways any use of such marks by Fujiﬁlm is under license. The SDHC
that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own- and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is
er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing a trademark of the CFA (CompactFlash Association). Theof stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even HDMI logo is a trademark or registered trademark of HDMI
when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked Licensing LLC. QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO
to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images WAVE INCORPORATED. USB Type-C® and USB-C® are regisor data protected under copyright laws is only permissible tered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum. AirGlu™ is awithin the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws.
trademark or registered trademark of Atomos. All other trade
names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or regisHandling
tered trademarks of their respective owners.
To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject
the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are Electrical Interference
being recorded.
This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equipment. Consult with hospital or airline staﬀ before using the
Liquid Crystal
camera in a hospital or on an aircraft.
In the event that the display is damaged, care should be taken to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action Color Television Systems
NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color teleindicated should any of the following situations arise:• If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the vision telecasting speciﬁcation adopted mainly in the U.S.A.,
area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color
television system adopted mainly in European countries andrunning water.
• If liquid crystal enters your eyes, ﬂush the aﬀected eye with China.
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical
Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
assistance.
Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera ﬁle format in which• If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly information stored with photographs is used for optimal colwith water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vomor reproduction during printing.
iting, then seek medical assistance.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software
Although the display is manufactured using extremely
high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed softalways lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and ware without the permission of the applicable governing
images recorded with the product are unaﬀected.
bodies is prohibited.
Lenses and Other Accessories• Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod.
• Fujiﬁlm will not be held liable for performance issues ordamage caused by the use of third-party accessories.

12378

For Your Safety
NOTICESTo prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.
Please read the “Safety Notes” and make sure you understand them before using the camera.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply. See:
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
For Customers in the U. S. A.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE

Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the government’s requirements for exposure to radio waves. This
device is designed and manufactured not to exceed theemission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy
set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.
Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25
Government.
Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25
The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of
FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC measurement known as the Speciﬁc Absorption Rate, or SAR.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and conducted using standard operating positions accepted by(2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certiﬁed
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
power level in all tested frequency bands.
CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant this product must be used with a Fujiﬁlm-speciﬁed ferto Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro- rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord.
vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, andthe product you have purchased. Please call
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how toused in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
recycle this battery.
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 4, Appliance Efﬁciency Regulations, Sections 1601 through
1609

Technical Notes

guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined byturning the equipment oﬀ and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit diﬀerent
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modiﬁcations not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

12379

For Customers in Canada
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B)In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana- Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or indian ICES-003.
the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its
Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus- packaging indicates that this product shall not
try Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the be treated as household waste. Instead it should
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause in- be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling ofterference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, electrical and electronic equipment.
including interference that may cause undesired operation By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you willof the device.
help prevent potential negative consequences to the enThis device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op- vironment and human health, which could otherwise be
erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection This symbol on the batteries or accumulators
feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. indicates that those batteries shall not be treated
Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scientiﬁc evi- as household waste.
dence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accuproof, however, that these low power wireless devices are mulators please dispose these separately according to yourabsolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels local requirements.
of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural rebeing used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health sources. For more detailed information about recycling thiseﬀects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does product, please contact your local city oﬃce, your household
not produce heating eﬀects causes no known adverse health waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased theeﬀects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not product.
found any biological eﬀects. Some studies have suggested In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland andthat some biological eﬀects might occur, but such ﬁndings Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including
have not been conﬁrmed by additional research. X-T50 has the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local aubeen tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal.
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
that they are to be disposed of separately.
Operation in the band 5150–5250 MHz is only for indoor use
to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems.
Caring for the Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions.

Technical Notes

Storage and Use
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera
in locations that are:• exposed to rain, steam, or smoke• very humid or extremely dusty• exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day• extremely cold
• subject to strong vibration• exposed to strong magnetic ﬁelds, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer,
or magnet• in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides• next to rubber or vinyl products

12380For Your Safety
Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions
This product complies with the following EU Directives:• RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU• RE Directive 2014/53/EU
Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF240001 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x-t50/pdf/x-t50_doc-ghe.pdf
The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/x-t50/pdf/x-t50_doc-ghe_uk.pdf
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:

381

Technical Notes

This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth®).
• Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):WLAN 2.4 GHz: 7.95 dBm
WLAN 5 GHz: 19.01 dBm
Bluetooth: 0.15 dBm
IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the camera’s built-in wireless transmitter.
Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States
Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United Statesembargoes goods.
device. Fujiﬁlm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized• Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.
use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems thatmay directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater
degree of reliability than oﬀered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions toensure safety and prevent malfunction.
• Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network
and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device.
Fujiﬁlm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions.
• Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter inthe vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic ﬁelds, static electricity, or radio interference thatmay prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity ofother wireless devices operating in the 2.4 GHz band.
• The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
• Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater attention to security than applies in the case of wired networks.
- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayedon your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have accessrights.
- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.
- Do not connect this device directly to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated byproviders or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services.
The• following may be punishable by law:
- Disassembly or modiﬁcation or this device- Removal of device certiﬁcation labels• This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also operates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking
systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications.
• To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Conﬁrm that the RFID transmitter is not in
operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used
for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the aﬀected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that
this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fujiﬁlm representative.

12

• Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-

uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when oﬀ. This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in
the network/USB setting menu before boarding.
• Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/
UK/HR. 5150 MHz–5350 MHz is for indoor use only.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certiﬁed output power level inall frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.672 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue.

U.K. Importer:
FUJIFILM UK Limited
Fujiﬁlm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom
EU Importer:
FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbHFujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany

Technical Notes

12382

For Your Safety
Be sure to read these notes before using the lens
Safety Notes

WARNING• Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety
notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use.
• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.

About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product isused incorrectly as a result.
This icon indicates that death or serious
WARNING injury can result if the information is ignored.
This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that theaction indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).

Do notimmerseDo not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to observe this precaution can cause a ﬁre or electric
shock.

Do notdisassemble

Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure
to observe this precaution can cause ﬁre, electric
shock, or injury due to product malfunction.

Should the case break open as the result of a fall or otheraccident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shockor in injury from touching the damaged parts. ReDo not touch
internal move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
parts
injury or electric shock, and take the product to thepoint of purchase for consultation.
Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may
fall, causing injury.
Do not view the sun through the lens or camera viewfinders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause
permanent visual impairment.

CAUTION
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
Failure to observe this precaution can cause ﬁre orelectric shock.
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution
can cause ﬁre.
Keep out of the reach of small children. This productcould cause injury in the hands of a child.
Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe thisprecaution can cause electric shock.
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when
the sun is in or close to the frame can cause ﬁreor burns.

Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other objects, causing injury.

Technical Notes

When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps andstore out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by thelens can cause ﬁre or burns.

12383

For Your Safety

WARNING• INGESTION HAZARD: This product contains a button cell or coin battery.

• DEATH or serious injury can occur if ingested.

• A swallowed button cell or coin battery
can cause Internal Chemical Burns in as
little as 2 hours.
• KEEP new and used batteries OUT OF
REACH of CHILDREN• Seek immediate medical attention if abattery is suspected to be swallowed orinserted inside any part of the body.
L Notes on the Buit-in Battery• This product contains a non-replaceable battery.
• The compatible battery type: MS621R• The nominal battery voltage: 3V• Remove and immediately recycle or dispose of used batteries according tolocal regulations and keep away from children.
Do NOT dispose of batteries in household trash or incinerate.
• Even used batteries may cause severe injury or death.
• Call a local poison control center for treatment information.
• Do not force discharge, disassemble, heat above 60 °C or incinerate.
Doing so may result in injury due to vending, leakage or explosion resulting
in chemical burns.
Technical Notes

12384

Product CareTo ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe
the following precautions.
Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after
each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals,
which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body.
Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately witha soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor,
taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft,
dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied. To prevent dust
entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is inplace.
Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in
identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the image sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING > SENSOR
CLEANING.

Technical Notes

12385

Cleaning the Image Sensor
Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING >SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as described below.

O Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if
it is damaged during cleaning.

1 Use a blower (not a brush) to remove
dust from the sensor.

2 Check whether the dust has been successfully removed.
3 Replace the body cap or lens.
N • Do not use a brush or blower brush. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the sensor.

• If dust cannot be removed, we recommend asking your Fujifilm dealer to perform a cleaning.

Technical Notes

12386

Firmware Updates
When the firmware has been updated, and features havebeen added and/or changed, update the firmware.

N After updating to the latest firmware, the features of the camera may
differ somewhat from what is listed in this manual.

Downloading Firmware
First download the latest firmware and save it to a memory card.
For the method to download the firmware, refer to the following
website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
Updating Firmware
Firmware can be updated in the following ways.
Updating the Firmware When Starting the Camera
Insert a memory card containing the new firmware into the camera. While pressing the DISP/BACK button, turn on the camera. The
firmware can be updated. After the update is finished, turn thecamera off once.
Updating the Firmware From the Setup Menus
Insert a memory card containing the new firmware into the camera. Select D USER SETTING > FIRMWARE UPDATE to update
the firmware.
Technical Notes

12
387

Updating the Firmware Using a Smartphone App (manual update)
If you are using a smartphone app, you can update the firmware
from the app. For details, refer to the following website.
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/
Updating the Firmware Using a Smartphone App (automatic update)
If FUJIFILM XApp Ver. 2.0.0 or later is used, the latest firmware will
be automatically downloaded to the camera from your smartphone.

1 When using the camera, a conﬁrma-tion screen will be displayed if the update is ready.
Select START.

READY FOR FIRMWARE UPDATESTARTCANCELN If CANCEL is selected, the confirmation screen will be displayed
again when the camera is turned on on the next day or later.

2 When the selection screen is displayed,
select UPDATE NOW.

FIRMWARE UPDATEFIRMWARE UPDATE OK?
UPDATE NOWSCHEDULE DATE AND TIMEREMIND ME LATERTURN OFF NOTIFICATIONFIRMWARE UPDATE IS AVAILABLE
IN THE MENUSETCANCEL

Technical Notes

N • Select SCHEDULE DATE AND TIME to automatically turn thecamera on on the specified date and time and update.
• Select REMIND ME LATER to display the confirmation screen 3days later.

• Select TURN OFF NOTIFICATION to display no confirmation
screen.

12388

Firmware Updates

3 Select OK.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen to update the ﬁrmware.
5 When the update completion screen is displayed, turn the camera oﬀ.

O • Use a battery with a sufficient charge to update the firmware. Do

not turn off or operate the camera during an update. If the camera
is turned off during a firmware update, the camera may no longer
operate normally.
• Nothing will be displayed on the EVF during a firmware update. Use
the LCD monitor.
• The time required for a firmware update depends on the size of thefirmware. At most, it may take about 10 minutes.
• It is not possible to return to a previous version after the firmware has
been updated.
• If an error message appears while the firmware is being updated, refer to the following website.
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en-int/manual/error_message_recovery/

Checking the Firmware Version
Select D USER SETTING > FIRMWARE UPDATE to check the version information.

N To view the firmware version or update firmware for optional accessories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted flash units, andmount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera.

Technical Notes

12389

Troubleshooting
Consult the table below should you encounter problems
using your camera. If you don’t find the solution here, contact your local Fujifilm distributor.
Power and Battery
Power and Battery
Problem

Solution• The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery before ﬁrst use.

The camera does notturn on.

• Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery(P 42).

• Reinsert in the correct orientation (P 39).
• Latch the battery-chamber cover.
• When using the battery in a low-temperature environ-ment, keep it warm in your pocket or elsewhere and install it just before shooting.
The battery runs down
Set G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF to OFF.
•quickly.
• Adjust the brightness of the display using D SCREEN
SET-UP > EVF BRIGHTNESS or LCD BRIGHTNESS.
• Change the D POWER MANAGEMENT setting.

Technical Notes

12390

Troubleshooting

Problem

The camera turns off
suddenly.

The camera does notturn off.

SolutionCheckwhetherthebattery
is running out of power•(P 46).
• When the time is set in D POWER MANAGEMENT >AUTO POWER OFF, the camera will automatically turnoﬀ after that time has elapsed.
• When the camera temperature becomes high, it will automatically turn oﬀ (P 324).
• If the interval shooting is long during interval-timer photography, the display on the screen will disappear. The
display on the screen will return to normal a few seconds
before shooting or when the shutter-release button ispressed.
Check the indicator lamp (P 12).

Charging
Problem

Solution• Charging will not start when the camera is turned on. Turnoﬀ the power.

• Charging will not start when the battery is fully charged.
• Check the connection status of your computer, USB ca-

bles, and the camera.
Charging does not start
When charging from a computer, make sure that the•(USB).
computer is turned on.
• When the battery temperature is low or high, charging
will not start for safety reasons. Wait for the battery temperature to return to normal temperature before charging
again.
Technical Notes

12391

Problem

Charging is slow.

SolutionWhen
thebatterytemperature
is low or high, charging•
may be slow for safety reasons. Wait for the battery temperature to return to normal temperature before charging
again.
• Use a USB PD compatible power supply with an output of
30 W or more to shorten the charging time.

The indicator lamp
blinks, but the battery Clean the terminals with a soft, dry cloth (P 39).
does not charge.

Power Supply
Problem
Solution
The power supply icon is Conﬁrm that POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is senot displayed.
lected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING.

Menus and Displays
Problem

Solution
Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING > Qa
Display is not in English.
(P 49, 293).

Technical Notes

12392Troubleshooting

Shooting
Basic Photography
Problem

Solution• Check whether the storage media is set correctly.
• Check whether the write-protect switch on the memory
card is not set to the lock position.

• Check the free space on the storage media.
• Select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHOOT
No picture is taken
when the shutter
button is pressed.

WITHOUT CARD when shooting without a memorycard.
• If FOCUS is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY, you may not be able toshoot when the camera is not in focus.
• If you are using a lens made by another manufacturer andthe like, you may be able to take pictures by selecting ON
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHOOT WITHOUT
LENS.

Movie Recording
Problem

Solution
Recording may stop if the writing speed of the storage media is slow. A list of supported storage media is available
Video recording ended
on the Fujiﬁlm website. For details, refer to “COMPATIBILITY
unexpectedly.
(Cameras)”.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/

Technical Notes

12
393

Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Problem

Solution
The burst shooting speed may be slower depending on
conditions such as lens type, writing speed of the storage
The burst shooting
media, ﬂash use, exposure conditions, camera settings, respeed is slowed down.
maining battery level, and temperature of the environment
in which the camera is used.

Panoramas
Problem
Solution
No panorama is recorded
when the shutter button Wait until the indicator lamps turns oﬀ (P 12).
is pressed.

Face Detection
Problem

Solution• Remove the obstructions.
• Change the composition so that the subject’s face occupies a larger area of the frame.

No face is detected.

• Ask the subject to face the camera.
• Select FACE DETECTION ON for G AF/MF
SETTING > g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING.

• Keep the camera level.
• Shoot in better light.

Technical Notes

12394Troubleshooting

Subject Detection
Problem

Solution• Choose a vantage point where you can see as much of thesubject as possible.

• Get closer to your subject so it occupies more of the frame.
No subject is detected.
• Select SUBJECT DETECTION ON for G AF/MF
SETTING > SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.

• Shoot in better light.
Flash
Problem

Solution• Check A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE,F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION SETTING,
and drive modes.
• When using an external ﬂash, check its instructions.
• Position the subject in range of the ﬂash.
• Hold the camera correctly.
The flash does not fully • If the shutter speed is faster than the sync speed, the image may look darker even when the ﬂash ﬁres. Choose
light the subject.
a shutter speed at the sync speed or slower than that(P 74, 81, 412).

The flash does not fire.

Technical Notes

12395

Abnormalities in Pictures Taken
Problem

Solution• Set the focus mode to a mode other than manual focus.
• Use a tripod when taking pictures. Also, it is recommend-

The picture is out offocus.
The picture is blurry.

Technical Notes

12396

ed to use the remote release and the self-timer shooting
function.
• When shooting handheld, hold the camera steady andgently press the shutter-release button to avoid camera
shake.
• Turn on the camera’s image stabilization function(P 182).
• When using a lens with image stabilization, turn on theimage stabilization function.
• The shutter speed may be slower in dark places. Use afaster shutter speed, increase the ISO sensitivity, or use aﬂash.
• Shoot with focus and exposure locked.
• Increase the size of the focus area by a couple of steps.

Troubleshooting

Problem

Solution• Certain phenomena that are not visible to the naked eyes

may be recorded in images due to the reﬂection of lightand other circumstances.
The camera records
The Q&A section of our website provides examples of•images of things that dosuch phenomena that may occur depending on the charnot exist, or the subject
acteristics of the camera system and the light beams. It
is recorded distorted.
may be possible to control the occurrence of the phenomenon by using diﬀerent shooting methods, so refer
to our website.
This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. * Select
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > PIXEL MAPPING.
Pictures are mottled.

* X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interactingwith the image sensor may cause bright spots of various colors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce
the occurrence of such bright spots.

Noise is recorded in theTurn oﬀ the power for a while before using (P 45, 407).
picture.

Technical Notes

12
397

PlaybackFull-Frame Playback
Problem
Pictures are grainy.
Playback zoom isunavailable.

Solution
The pictures were taken with a diﬀerent make or model ofcamera.
The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a diﬀerent
make or model of camera.

Movie Playback
Problem
No sound in movie
playback.

Solution• Adjust playback volume (P 299).
• Do not block the microphone during movie recording.
• Do not block the speaker during playback.

Deletion
Problem
Solution
Selected pictures are notdeleted.
Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected.
Pictures remain after Remove protection using the device with which it was
ERASE > ALL FRAMES is originally applied (P 242).
selected.

Frame Number
ProblemTechnical Notes

File numbering is
unexpectedly reset.

12398

Solution
The battery-chamber cover was opened while the camera was on. Turn the camera oﬀ before opening the battery-chamber cover (P 325).

Troubleshooting

During Connection
Connecting to TV
Problem

Solution
When the camera is connected to a TV, nothing will be disThe monitor is blank.
played on the camera screen in playback mode.
Both the TV and camera • Put your eye to the viewﬁnder.
monitor are blank.
• Change the EVF/LCD display settings (P 18).
• Connect the camera properly.
• Set input to “HDMI” (P 55).
No picture or sound• Use the controls on the television to adjust the volume.
on TV.
• Check the supported resolution and frame rate on the TV
side.

Connecting to Computers
Problem

Solution
Check
the
USB
cable
and
reconnect it correctly (P 265).
•• Set the connection mode according to your intended use
The computer does not in advance before connecting the camera.
recognize the camera. • Set the camera connection mode compatible with theapplication used on the computer. Also, check the settings of the application on the computer.

Technical Notes

12399

Connecting to Smartphones
ProblemCannot connect toiPhones or iPads.

Cannot connect tosmartphone.

Technical Notes

12400

Solution
POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is selected for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING. Select POWER
SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON when the camera is connected
via a Lightning connection to a device that do not supply
power.
The procedure for connecting the camera varies with thetype of connector with which the smartphone is equipped(P 262).

Troubleshooting

Wireless Transfer
For additional information on troubleshooting wireless connections, visit:https://digitalcamera-support-en.fujifilm.com/
ProblemCannot connect tosmartphone.
The camera is slow
to connect or upload
pictures to thesmartphone.
Upload fails or isinterrupted.

Solution• Move the devices closer (P 258).
• Use the camera away from devices that emit radio waves.
• The smartphone and camera can connect to only one

device at a time. End the connection and try again(P 258).
• Try connecting again. The presence of multiple smartphones can make connection diﬃcult.
Cannot upload images.
• The camera may not be able to upload images createdon other devices.
• Uploading movies takes some time. In addition, smartphones may not accept upload of movies in formats they
do not support.

Technical Notes

12
401Troubleshooting

Miscellaneous
Camera Operation
Problem

Solution• Remove and reinsert the battery (P 39).
• Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery(P 42).

The camera is unresponsive.

The camera does not
function as expected.

• Check the USB or LAN connection mode.
• Press and hold the MENU/OK button to unlock the controls(P 15, 17).

• Check the lighting status of the indicator lamp. If the

problem persists, reinsert the battery and check whether
the camera operates.
• Select D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > LOCK to check
whether the buttons are locked.
Remove and reinsert the battery (P 39). If the problem
persists, contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer.

Sound
Problem
No sound.

Solution
Adjust the volume (P 296).

Q (The Quick Menu)
ProblemPressing the Q button
does not display thequick menu.
Technical Notes

12
402

Solution
End TTL-LOCK (P 185).

Warning Messages and Displays
The following warnings appear in the display.
Warning

Description
Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-chargedi (red)spare battery.
Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a fulj (blinks red)ly-charged spare battery.
The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on ans (displayed in red withother subject at the same distance, then recompose thered focus frame)
picture.
The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be
Aperture or shutter
over- or under-exposed. Use the ﬂash for additional lightspeed displayed in red
ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject.
FOCUS ERROR
Camera malfunction. Turn the camera oﬀ, remove the lens,
LENS CONTROL ERROR and check for foreign matter between the lens and the
TURN OFF THE CAMERA camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera
AND TURN ON AGAIN on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has beenformatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory
card using D USER SETTING > FORMAT.
CARD NOT INITIALIZED • The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.

Technical Notes

12403

Warning
LENS ERRORCARD ERRORPROTECTED CARD
BUSYb MEMORY FULL

Technical Notes

12404

Description
Turn the camera oﬀ, remove the lens, and check for foreign matter between the lens and the camera body, thenreplace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem
persists, contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: Format the card.
• The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory cardis damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If themessage is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
The memory card is locked. Unlock the card.
The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera
to format the card.
The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded.
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more freespace.

Warning Messages and Displays

Warning

Description• Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or

WRITE ERROR

FRAME NO. FULL

turn the camera oﬀ and then on again. If the message
persists, contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
• Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more freespace.
• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card.
• The memory card was removed while data were being recorded:
Do not remove the memory card during recording.
• The memory card write speed is slow: When recording movies, be sure the memory card write speed is fast enough.
The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame
number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card andselect RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP > FRAME NO..
Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, thenselect CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO..

Technical Notes

12405

Warning

Description• The file is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The ﬁlecannot be viewed.

READ ERROR• The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected
PROTECTED FRAME
picture. Remove protection and try again.
CAN NOT CROP
The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera.
Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy
DPOF FILE ERROR
any additional pictures you wish to print to another memory card and create a second print order.
CAN NOT SET DPOF
The picture cannot be printed using DPOF.
F CAN NOT SET DPOF Movies cannot be printed using DPOF.
CAN NOT ROTATE
The selected picture cannot be rotated.
F CAN NOT ROTATE Movies cannot be rotated.

Technical Notes

12406

Warning Messages and Displays

Warning
Description
F CANNOT EXECUTE The selected operation is not supported: Check whether them CANNOT EXECUTE picture was recorded with a diﬀerent model of camera.
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature alp (yellow)
CAMERA IS APPROACHING lowed when STANDARD is selected for AUTO POWER
OFF TEMP. and will shortly turn oﬀ automatically. Turn the
STANDARD
camera oﬀ and wait for it to cool.
TEMPERATURE LIMITThe camera is approaching the maximum temperatureallowed when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF
p (yellow)
TEMP. and will shortly turn oﬀ automatically. Remaining
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
in contact with the camera could result in low-temperature
HIGH TEMPERburns; mount the camera on a tripod or take other steps to
ATURE LIMIT.DO NOT
avoid prolonged contact with the camera. The camera will
HOLD CAMERA FOR
shortly turn oﬀ automatically. Turn the camera oﬀ and wait
LONG PERIODS OF TIME
for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when
this warning is displayed.
The camera temperature has reached the cutoﬀ point andp (red)the camera is about to turn oﬀ automatically. Turn the camHIGH TEMPERATURE
era oﬀ and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in picLIMIT REACHED
tures taken when this warning is displayed.
SHUTTING DOWNTechnical Notes

12407

Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the recording time or numberof pictures available at different image sizes. All figures areapproximate; file size varies with the scene recorded, producing wide variations in the number of files that can be
stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may
not diminish at an even rate.
SD memory cards
64 GB

Capacity

T

FINE
O 3∶2

RAW (UNCOMPRESSED)
PhotosRAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)
RAW (COMPRESSED)
Movies *

V2160
W1080

NORMAL

2640

3950
730
1370
1940
79 minutes
79 minutes* Assumes default bit rate.

O • The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with thesettings selected (P 63).

• Depending on the bit rate, shots saved to memory cards with a capacityof 32 GB or less may be recorded across multiple files without interruption.
The same is true of shots over an hour in length, independent of the bit
rate and memory card capacity.

Technical Notes

12
408

Specifications
SystemModel
Product Number
Effective pixels
Image sensor
Storage media
Memory card slots
File system

FUJIFILM X-T50
FF240001
Approx. 40.2 million
23.5 mm × 15.7 mm (APS-C), X-Trans CMOS 5 HR sensor withprimary color ﬁlter
Fujiﬁlm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
SD memory card slot (UHS-II compliant)• Still pictures: Compliant with DCF 2.0• Compressed: Exif 2.32 JPEG-baseline compliant; DPOF compliant; HEIF compliant (4 : 2 : 2, 10-bit)• Uncompressed or compressed using a reversible or non-reversible
algorithm: RAW (original RAF format; special-purpose software
required); RAW+JPEG available; TIFF (RGB)• Movies: Compliant with HEVC/H.265, and H.264• Audio (including voice memos):- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)- AAC (MP4 recordings only)• Audio (via XLR microphone adapter):- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling; four channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)- AAC (MP4 recordings only; two channels: 16-bit, 48 kHz
sampling)

Technical Notes

12409

System
Image size

O 3 : 2 (7728 × 5152)
O 4 : 3 (6864 × 5152)
O 5 : 4 (6432 × 5152)
O 16 : 9 (7728 × 4344)
O 1 : 1 (5152 × 5152)
P 3 : 2 (5472 × 3648)
P 4 : 3 (4864 × 3648)
P 5 : 4 (4560 × 3648)
P 16 : 9 (5472 × 3080)
P 1 : 1 (3648 × 3648)
Q 3 : 2 (3888 × 2592)
Q 4 : 3 (3456 × 2592)
Q 5 : 4 (3264 × 2592)
Q 16 : 9 (3888 × 2184)
Q 1 : 1 (2592 × 2592)
RAW (7728 × 5152)
TIFF (7728 × 5152)
O panorama: vertical (2160 × 9600)/horizontal (9600 × 1440)
P panorama: vertical (2160 × 6400)/horizontal (6400 × 1440)
Lens mount
FUJIFILM X mountSensitivity• Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to
ISO 125–12800 in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO 1–3; extended
output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 64, 80, 100, 25600, or 51200• Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 125–12800
in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 25600
Metering
256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;
MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED
Exposure control
Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;
aperture-priority AE; manual exposure
Exposure compensation • Still pictures: −5 EV – +5 EV in increments of ⁄ EV• Movies: −2 EV–+2 EV in increments of ⁄ EV

Technical Notes

12410

Specifications

SystemShutter speed• MECHANICAL SHUTTER, E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER, E-FRONT +MECHANICAL⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ¼ s⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ¼ s⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
• ELECTRONIC SHUTTER⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ⁄ s⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s⁃ Bulb: Fixed at 1 s• MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC, E-FRONT + MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ⁄ s⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
O The shutter speed ranges for continuous mode may
differ from those listed here.
Continuous
CONTINUOUS MODE
20fps(1.29X CROP) 1
13fps(1.29X CROP) 1
10fps(1.29X CROP) 1
13fps 1
8.0fps 2
5.0fps
4.0fps
3.0fpsAvailable frame advance rates(JPEG)
20
13
10
13
8.0
5.0
4.0
3.0

1 Available with electronic shutter only.
2 8.9 fps with electronic shutter.

ies with shooting conditions and type of memory
card used.

Technical Notes

O The frame rate and number of frames per burst var-

12411

System
Focus• Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring
• Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/phase-detection AF)• Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL
White balanceTechnical Notes

Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1,
Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sunlight, shade, daylight ﬂuorescent, warm white ﬂuorescent,cool white ﬂuorescent, incandescent, underwater
Self-timer• Still pictures: Oﬀ, 2 sec., 10 sec.
• Movies: Oﬀ, 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec.
Flash
• Type: Manual pop-up ﬂash unit
• Guide number: Approx. 3.9/12.8 (ISO 100, m/ft.)
Flash mode
• MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.),
MANUAL, COMMANDER, OFF• SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (highspeed sync)• RED EYE REMOVAL: L FLASH, OFF
Hot shoe
Provided (supports TTL ﬂash control); supports sync speeds
as fast as ⁄ s
Sync contact
X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as ⁄ s
Sync terminal–
Electronic viewfinder 0.39-in., 2360k-dot OLED viewﬁnder; magniﬁcation 0.62× with
50 mm lens (35 mm format equivalent) at inﬁnity and diopter(EVF)
set to −1.0 m−1; diagonal angle of view approximately 31°(horizontal angle of view approximately 26°)
• Diopter adjustment: −4 to +2 m−1• Eyepoint: Approximately 17.5 mm
LCD monitor
3.0-in/7.6 cm, 1840k-dot color touchscreen LCD monitor,
tilting

12412

Specifications

SystemMovies(with stereo sound)• Movie size: J 16 : 9, T 16 : 9, W 17 : 9, V 16 : 9, 1 17 : 9,
W 16 : 9, W 17 : 9• Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P• Recording/output format:- H.265 (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2/4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50 Mbps)- H.264 (8-bit MOV/MP4 4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50Mbps)- HDMI output supported (RAW output supported with
Atomos and Blackmagic Design external recorders; 8-bit
4 : 2 : 2/10-bit 4 : 2 : 2)
High-speed movies • Movie size: W 16∶9, W 17∶9
• Frame advance rate: 240P, 200P, 120P, 100P
Input/output terminals
Microphone connector ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jackHeadphone jack socket The USB connector can be converted to a headphone jackusing the supplied headphone adapter
Remote release connector ⌀3.5 mm 3-pole mini jack
Digital input/output USB connector: USB Type-C® USB 10 Gbps
HDMI output
HDMI Micro connector (type D)

Technical Notes

12413

Power supply/otherPower supply
NP-W126S rechargeable battery (supplied with camera)
Battery life
• Battery type: NP-W126S• Lens: XF35mmF1.4 R• External flash units: Disabled• Shooting mode: Mode P
Number of shots
PERFORMANCELCD
EVF
Approx. 300
Approx. 270
BOOST 1NORMAL
Approx. 305
Approx. 310
ECONOMYApprox. 390
Approx. 360
Total length of footage that can be recorded ona single charge
Continuance
Actual battery life
battery life ofModeof movie capture
movie capture
Approx. 45 minutes
Approx. 70 minutes
J2
Approx. 45 minutes
Approx. 70 minutes
V3
Approx. 45 minutes
Approx. 80 minutes
W3
High-speed movies 4 Approx. 50 minutes–
1 EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (100P) selected EVF/LCD
BOOST SETTING.
2 At a frame rate of 29.97 fps.
3 At a frame rate of 59.94 fps.
4 At a frame rate of 120 fps.

Technical Notes

CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera
and SD memory card.
Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level andthe ﬁgures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endurance will decline at low temperatures.

12414

Specifications

Power supply/other
Camera size
123.8 mm × 84.0 mm × 48.8 mm (34.2 mm excluding projections,(W × H × D)measured at thinnest part)/4.87 in. × 3.31 in. × 1.92 in. (1.35 in.)Camera weight
Approx. 389 g/13.7 oz., excluding battery, accessories, andmemory card
Shooting weight
Approx. 438 g/15.4 oz., including battery and memory card
Operating conditions • Temperature: 0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F (+5 °C to+40 °C/+41 °F to +104 °F when battery is charging)• Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation)

Technical Notes

Wireless transmitter
Wireless LAN
Standards
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol)
Operating frequency • Israel, Indonesia: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)(center frequency)• USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels): 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,745 MHz–5,825 MHz (UNII-3)• European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, Newzealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore,
Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain,
Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels): 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,500 MHz–5,700 MHz (W56)
Access protocols
Infrastructure
Bluetooth®
Standards
Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy)
Operating frequency 2,402 MHz–2,480 MHz(center frequency)

12415

Specifications

NP-W126S rechargeable battery
Nominal voltage
7.2 V
Nominal capacity
1260 mAh
Operating
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
temperature
Dimensions
36.4 mm × 47.1 mm × 15.7 mm/1.4 in. × 1.9 in. × 0.6 in.
(W × H × D)
WeightApprox. 47 g/1.7 oz.

O Specifications and performance are subject to change without notice.
Fujifilm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
The appearance of the product may differ from that described in thismanual.

Technical Notes

12
416

MEMO

417

MEMO

418

MEMO

419

7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPANhttps://fujifilm-x.com